Computer Applications - Online Courses

These online courses are 6 weeks long, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week. You are not required to be online at any specific time. You register and pay on our website and instructions on how to access your course will be emailed to you immediately after registration.



Introduction to Adobe Acrobat X

Introduction to Adobe Acrobat X

$190 + applicable tax

If all you think Acrobat does is create PDF files, you're in for a big surprise! In this course, you'll discover how to bring together a wide range of content from dozens of programs that you can reuse and customize in Acrobat X Pro. Need to change some text? No problem. Create a new file? That's easy. Add a page from this file and an image from that file? Or add a new page? Not a big deal. You can do all that and more!

Bringing together content is just the beginning. You'll work with many features, such as backgrounds, bookmarks, and modified page sizes to help unify your documents. You'll see how to protect your work using password security, and dig into the metadata within your PDF file. You'll discover how to add more to your documents as you learn about bookmarks and links for navigation. You'll even master some JavaScript! 

You'll learn how Acrobat X can automatically find and configure fields on a page to convert it to a form. Then you'll use form tracking to send your form to others to fill in and send back to you, and see how Acrobat X collects the data automatically in a specialized PDF Portfolio. 

You'll also see how Acrobat X can help streamline the entire collaboration process and simplify how you conduct, control, and manage a document review cycle. You'll even find out how to work in real-time using a chat window in Acrobat X or online using a free Web conferencing room. Finally, you'll discover how to wrap a set of PDF files (and other documents, too) into a PDF Portfolio, complete with a Flash interface and display features, to create the ultimate in customized presentations.

In each lesson, you'll work with an important Acrobat X Pro feature or process using source files (available for both Mac and Windows) provided with the course. You'll soon see why Adobe Acrobat X has become the best-selling Adobe software of all time!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Meet Adobe Acrobat X
Imagine taking a document, a spreadsheet, an image or two, and a few slides from a presentation and then putting them all together into one file—complete with page numbers, a custom footer, and even some animation. Does it sound too good to be true? It's not! Adobe Acrobat X allows you to do all this and more. By the end of this first lesson, you'll know how to make your way around Acrobat X and set different program preferences. You'll even make your first PDF file from an image (a logo for the fictional business we'll follow through the course).

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a PDF Document
Where do new PDF files come from? To answer that question, we'll start Lesson 2 with a discussion on planning your project's workflow. You'll try out several different methods to create a PDF document using common programs including Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. You'll find out how to work with PDFMaker, a toolbar that Acrobat installs in some Microsoft programs that helps you choose settings and create PDF files automatically. You'll also work with the Adobe PDF Printer, which allows you to produce PDF files from programs that don't export them directly.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Designing a New PDF File
Today, instead of using PDF documents converted from many different types of files, you'll see how to add a blank page to a  PDF file. We'll try importing some text from another file, and format the text in Acrobat. Along with typing text in the page, we'll work with the editing tools to manipulate the content on the page and add some graphics.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Changing and Moving Pages in a PDF File
Mixing and matching—moving pages from one document to another—is a common way to edit PDF files. Acrobat X Pro offers a number of techniques for combining and changing page content. You'll start today with simple files, and then you'll see how to add and delete pages, as well as learn specialized ways to slip a new page into a document without disturbing any of the elements added to the page, such as links or bookmarks. You'll combine documents (and even specific pages from documents) into one PDF document, and you'll find out how to resize or crop pages so that they all match. You'll learn about metadata—the information Acrobat X stores about a document. Finally, you'll discover how to add password protection that lets you specify whether users can print or use contents from your files.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Applying Common Page Elements
It's one thing to bring together content from different types of files. It's quite another to make the content look like it belongs together! In this lesson, you'll learn about Acrobat features that help make your document look more uniform. You'll work with backgrounds and watermarks that can be either text or graphics. You'll see how to use headers and footers that you can customize using your own text, choices of fonts, colors, and so on. You'll also use the Snapshot tool to create a new PDF document from a page segment. By the end of this lesson, you'll be able to easily make all your documents look put together, whether they started out as two files or 10!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Navigating with Bookmarks and Attachments
When you work with a table of contents in Acrobat and many other programs, you click a link on the page to take you to a certain part of the document. But then how do you get back to the table of contents to find another topic? Acrobat X solves that problem by using bookmarks. Today you'll learn about building and displaying bookmarks in a separate pane that stays visible while the file is open. You'll discover different ways to create bookmarks and customize their appearance to match your document. Then we'll take a look at adding attachments to your PDF document. If you've ever had to send someone an email and had trouble remembering if you sent all the necessary attachments, you'll like this feature.  We'll wind up the lesson looking at some ways to make your files more compact.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Navigating With Links
Everyone knows how to use links on a webpage: Just click them to get to the linked page. In this lesson, you'll learn about using links in a PDF file. You'll start working with Acrobat JavaScript—and you don't need to be a programmer to use it—to add multiple links and work with custom actions. Like Web links, links in Acrobat can open another PDF document, show another page, or send an email. Next, you'll find out about linking to webpages from a PDF file and downloading a webpage to create or add to a document right in Acrobat. And we won't just talk about text links—you'll also create a link from an image.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Designing a PDF Form
Did you know that Acrobat X includes an Artificial Intelligence module? While it can't perform any science fiction magic, it can look at a document, decide where you'd like to have form fields, and then add and name the fields for you automatically. Today you'll see how it works with PDF forms, also called AcroForms. You'll learn about using the Form Wizard to produce a form for you, and then we'll look at some ways to add more form fields. You'll have a chance to calculate prices for different products in the form you create and even build a button that changes its appearance when you click it.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Adding Comments to a PDF Document
Collaborating on a document—sharing it with others and gathering their feedback—is one of the most popular uses of Acrobat. In this lesson, you discover how to use common commenting tools and customize the program to make it simpler for you to work. We'll go through each group of tools and check out the corresponding group of commenting preferences along the way. You'll first learn about Sticky Notes and customizing how you view comments. Next, you'll use the Highlights and Callouts and decide how and where you like to read the comment contents. We'll finish by trying out Stamp comments and making a custom stamp.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Tracking Document Reviews
Once you've learned to add and configure comments, you need something to do with them. So today you'll work with a document review. You'll see how to start a shared review, send email invitations, and work online at Acrobat.com. You'll learn how to set up and manage a review, including different ways to work with comments.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Distributing and Managing Forms
In this lesson, we'll take your collaboration skills to the next level. We'll start by adding another type of form field to our form, then you'll discover how to distribute the form you created in an earlier lesson. Along the way, you'll see how to use Tracker, an automated feature that monitors your form's distribution process. Acrobat X Pro also includes a PDF Portfolio feature that you'll work with as you collect form results. The PDF Portfolio includes some tools that let you filter and sort your data and export it to other programs. You'll also see how to create an Excel spreadsheet from the form data you collect. Then you'll find out how to work in real time with others using Collaborate Live, and see how to work online in your own ConnectNow Web conferencing space.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Designing a PDF Portfolio
Just when you think you couldn't possibly learn any more ways to combine and break down documents in Acrobat, we'll talk about Portfolios! We'll start by preparing the files for the final Portfolio project. You'll find out how to split a document into several parts using a couple of different methods, and then see how to automate some preparation details used actions. Once we've prepared the files, we'll start a PDF Portfolio. Then you'll try out different appearance features, add some images, and work with color schemes. Finally, you'll learn how to manage the content of your PDF Portfolio, such as adding folders and moving files. By the end of this lesson, you'll be ready to use Acrobat to combine, create, and collaborate on documents like never before!
Adobe Acrobat X Professional  (Windows) or Adobe Acrobat X Standard  (Windows), either as a standalone product or as part of a collection; Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7. Adobe Acrobat X Professional [Mac], either as a standalone product or part of a collection; Mac OS X Tiger (10.4.11), Leopard (10.5.x), Snow Leopard (10.6.x) or Mac OS X Intel.

Note: Acrobat X software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins. Microsoft Office programs such as Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel, and Adobe Creative Suite programs such as Adobe InDesign, Photoshop, and Illustrator are used in preparation of the course materials, although they aren't necessary to complete the course. Access to these programs will be useful for personal project development.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to InDesign CC

Introduction to InDesign CC

$190 + applicable tax

Have you ever seen a terrific-looking brochure or newsletter and wondered how it was made? Chances are the designer used Adobe InDesign CC, the industry-standard desktop publishing software now available through the Creative Cloud. The course is applicable to any version of InDesign CS4 or newer.

In each lesson, we'll cover an important aspect of InDesign CC as you prepare a range of print and online products for a fictional company, Natalie's Nautical Emporium. You'll get dozens of files to work with, including a partially completed InDesign document used to start each lesson. Then you'll use the downloaded graphics, images, fonts, and other content to complete the project. And to check your work or troubleshoot any problems you encounter, you'll always get a copy of the finished InDesign project file.

Lesson by lesson, you'll discover how the program features relate to producing actual usable documents as we explore the best ways to create different types of material, how to reuse items such as colors and artwork, and how to produce publications for different page sizes and devices. You'll come away knowing how to use this popular page layout software to design and create professional-quality letterhead, business cards, brochures, forms, interactive PDF files, an eBook, and more. You don't have to be a designer or an artist to produce professional quality documents!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Making Your Way Around InDesign CC
Wouldn't it be terrific if you could use one program to create all the different types of print materials you need for your small business, organization, or family—such as letterhead, forms, and even brochures and business cards? Well, you can! We'll spend this first lesson going over all the different types of content you can produce with InDesign. We'll explore the InDesign workspace and tools, and then we'll get right to work on our first project—a logo for the fictional business we'll create materials for throughout this course!

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Setting Up a New Document
Today, you'll learn all about starting and saving a new document. What's one of the most common types of print documents? If you said, "letterhead," you'd be right and well on your way into this lesson's project. By the end of the session, you'll know how to choose settings for a new file, add background images, and organize your content to create a custom letterhead. You'll also add a second page to create a matching envelope, and you'll learn how to add a custom Master page for the envelope. And as in all of our lessons, we'll go over how to use the specific colors, styles, and logo for our fictional business, but you'll be able to use the same techniques for your personal business or projects.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Organizing Objects on a Layout

Organization is a key ingredient in successful work of any kind, and it's critical to successfully using InDesign. In this lesson, you'll learn about organizing in two ways. First, you'll see how to use a workflow, or an order of operations for creating an InDesign publication. Then we'll go over how to organize materials on a page and how to use many of InDesign's tools for aligning, organizing, and laying out your content. In the process, we'll complete three projects: a sheet of address stickers, a sheet of business cards, and a reusable business card template.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Setting Up a Multipage Document
Many of your projects will use multiple pages with different layouts. Designing a catalog layout is the perfect way to learn these skills, and that's what we'll focus on today. We'll work with two different column layouts while exploring other InDesign features (like grids and document coordinates) that can help you lay out a page evenly. We'll also go over using graphic and text frame placeholders so you don't have to add content to the page to see its layout. For a final touch of realism, we'll use placeholder text during the design process to give you a good idea of how a page will look when you're finished. You'll see how to add a graphic into an existing frame and make it fit, as well as how to add content instantly using a file called a snippet.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Adding, Editing, and Threading Text
Managing text in precise and interesting ways is one of the big advantages of working with InDesign rather than a word-processing program. In this lesson, we'll begin a two-page brochure project that will take us two lessons to complete. In this first part, you'll learn different methods for adding text to your publication. Once the text is in place, you'll see how to check your text for typos and errors. We'll go over how to work with text in simple text frames and how to design threaded text (where the text slides through linked text frames on the page yet stays within the defined structure). We'll also use the Story Editor as an alternative to adding content in a layout view. You'll finish the lesson working with two columns in a single frame, and you'll see how to balance the content and auto-size the frame.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Importing Graphics and Images
The two key elements in any print project are, of course, text and images. We went over text in our last lesson, so today, we'll finish up our two-page brochure project by going over just about everything you need to know about working with images—adding them to the page in different ways, adjusting their positions, and using various commands for coordinating their sizes, proportions, and frames. We'll begin by adding images to the brochure project pages we worked on in Lesson 5, and then we'll check out some special ways to add batches of images at once to make an image collage and to place images in interesting frames. Speaking of interesting—you'll also see how you can use InDesign transparency effects to add pizzazz to any project. You'll wind up the lesson making a printable photo cube from a template.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Drawing and Working With Shapes
You might be surprised to learn that InDesign provides you with some of the same sophisticated drawing tools that you'll find in Adobe Illustrator. For example, InDesign offers the Pathfinder tool, which is the perfect tool to use if you need to combine simply drawn shapes and convert them into more complex and interesting objects. In this lesson, you'll learn how to work with some of the drawing tools to design a poster for a fashion show. You'll see how to draw several simple shapes and stack them using blend modes for interesting effects. One of the topics we'll go over is a text wrap, which is a special way to work with a drawing to tell InDesign where you want your text to display on your page. If you've ever wondered how to make text follow the shape of an object, curving around it on the page, our practice today will solve the mystery!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Managing and Applying Color
Did you know that your eyes can see over 16 million different colors? It's true! Fortunately, you don't have to work with that many colors in InDesign. But if you ever find yourself trying to choose between thousands and thousands of color possibilities, you'll understand why InDesign offers you so many different ways to work with your choices. In this lesson, you'll learn the best methods for choosing, naming, and organizing colors. You'll practice working with solid colors as well as gradients (which let you display a range of color within an object), and we'll round out the lesson by using some more special effects in today's fun project—a greeting card.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Designing Tables and Creating Forms
When you need to display bits of information in your publication and want to ensure it's easy to read, it's time to use a table. InDesign offers you lots of tools for designing and formatting tables while helping you make sure your content will coordinate with other documents. You'll see how this works today as we practice building tables for an invoice. You'll also find out how to use color tints in your table, as well as how to use styles to quickly and consistently reuse any of your layout features. Finally, we'll experiment with an interactive PDF form. You'll add some fields to a blank form, see how to configure a text field or button, and produce the PDF form.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Storing Text and Color Information

Recycling doesn't just apply to items in your home or business. In this lesson, you'll see how to use the 3R's of recycling in InDesign to complete a newsletter project. As you recycle and modify colors and styles from previous lessons to create new styles in your newsletter, you'll also reuse a lot of the tools and skills you've used in previous lessons. Learning to effectively use all of InDesign's tools and features in a variety of different ways on many different projects is what it's all about!

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Creating and Distributing a Complex Document
Whether you're designing publications for business, hobbies, or social or community activities, odds are you'll need to share them at some point. InDesign provides many options for exporting and reusing a document, as well as printing. We'll review a few of them today as we design a postcard using special fonts, colors, and image layout features. We'll also check out Kuler, the Adobe InDesign extension and online application used for color design. Have you ever seen text that shows an image of some sort through the letters and wondered how it's done? You'll know after today's lesson! By the time you finish this lesson, you'll know how to export a publication as an image, print directly from your desktop, or create a compact PDF version of your finished publication ready to email.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Working With Color Separations, Special Layouts, and E-books
In this final lesson, we'll really test InDesign's versatility. First, we'll use a two-color version of the business cards you worked with early in the course and dig into color separations—a common method of preparing a file for a professional print shop. We'll try out special layout tools for producing alternate page layouts of different sizes in the same document. Finally, we'll wind up the course by creating an e-book.

Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows), Adobe CS6 Design and Web Premium (Windows), Adobe CS6 Master Collection (Windows), InDesign CS6 (Mac), Adobe CS6 Design and Web Premium (Mac), Adobe CS6 Master Collection (Mac), or Adobe InDesign CC Student or Retail versions (Mac or Windows); Older versions of Adobe InDesign are also applicable, including all versions of Adobe InDesign CS5 and CS4 (Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7 with Service Pack 1, Windows 8 or Windows 10; Mac OS X v10.6.8, v10.7, v10.8, or v10.9.

Other requirements: Windows - Intel Pentium 4 or AMD Athlon 64 processor, 2GB of RAM (8GB recommended); Mac OS - Multicore Intel processor, 2GB of RAM (8GB recommended)

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to InDesign CS6

Introduction to InDesign CS6

$190 + applicable tax

In this Adobe InDesign CS6 class, you'll get hands-on desktop publishing training and come away knowing how to use this popular page layout software program to design and create professional-quality letterhead, business cards, brochures, PDF files that play movies, and more. You'll discover that you don't have to be a designer or an artist to produce professional-quality documents!
In each lesson, we'll cover an important aspect of InDesign CS6 as you prepare a range of print and online products for Natalie, the fictional owner of Natalie's Nautical Emporium. You'll get dozens of files to use in the lessons—partially completed InDesign files, as well as the graphics, images, fonts, and other content required for the project. And to check your work or troubleshoot any problems you encounter, you'll always get a copy of the finished InDesign project file.
 

Lesson by lesson, you'll explore the best ways to use the features in this program to create different types of material, how to organize and name your files, and how to reuse items such as colors and artwork. By the time you finish the course, you'll not only be comfortable with the tools and features that InDesign CS6 offers, you'll also know the most efficient ways to use the program to produce the materials you need for your own work, recreation, or hobbies.
 

 

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Making Your Way Around InDesign CS6
Wouldn't it be terrific if you could use one program to create all the different types of print materials you need for your small business, organization, or family—such as letterhead, forms, and even brochures and business cards? Well, you can! We'll spend this first lesson going over all the different types of content you can produce with InDesign. We'll explore the InDesign workspace and tools, and then we'll get right to work on our first project—a logo for the fictional business we'll create materials for throughout this course!

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Setting Up a New Document
Today, you'll learn all about starting and saving a new document. What's one of the most common types of print documents? If you said, "letterhead," you'd be right, and well on your way into this lesson's project. By the end of the session, you'll know how to choose settings for a new file, add background images, and organize your content to create a custom letterhead. You'll also add a second page to create a matching envelope. And as in all of our lessons, we'll go over how to use the specific colors, styles, and logo for our fictional business, but you'll be able to use the same techniques for your personal business or projects.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Organizing Objects on a Layout

Organization is a key ingredient in successful work of any kind, and it's critical to successfully using InDesign. In this lesson, you'll learn about organizing in two ways. First, you'll see how to use a workflow, or an order of operations for creating an InDesign publication. Then we'll go over how to organize materials on a page and how to use many of InDesign's tools for aligning, organizing, and laying out your content. In the process, we'll complete three projects: a sheet of address stickers, a sheet of business cards, and a reusable business card template.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Setting Up a Multipage Document
Many of your projects will use multiple pages with different layouts. Designing a catalog layout is the perfect way to learn these skills, and that's what we'll focus on today. We'll work with two different column layouts while exploring other InDesign features (like grids and document coordinates) that can help you lay out a page evenly. We'll also go over using graphic and text frame placeholders, so you don't have to add content to the page to see its layout. For a final touch of realism, we'll use placeholder text during the design process to give you a good idea of how a page will look when you're finished. You'll see how to add a graphic into an existing frame and make it fit, as well as how to add content instantly using a file called a snippet.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Adding, Editing, and Threading Text
Managing text in precise and interesting ways is one of the big advantages of working with InDesign rather than a word-processing program. In this lesson, we'll begin a two-page brochure project that will take us two lessons to complete. In this first part, you'll learn different methods for adding text to your publication. Once the text is in place, you'll see how to check your text for typos and errors. We'll go over how to work with text in simple text frames and how to design threaded text (where the text slides through linked text frames on the page yet stays within the defined structure). We'll also use the Story Editor as an alternative to adding content in a layout view. You'll finish the lesson working with two columns in a single frame, and you'll see how to balance the content and auto-size the frame.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Importing Graphics and Images
The two key elements in any print project are, of course, text and images. We went over text in our last lesson, so today, we'll finish up our two-page brochure project by going over just about everything you need to know about working with images—adding them to the page in different ways, adjusting their positions, and using various commands for coordinating their sizes, proportions, and frames. We'll begin by adding images to the brochure project pages we worked on in Lesson 5, and then we'll check out some special ways to add batches of images at once to make an image collage and to place images in interesting frames. Speaking of interesting—you'll also see how you can use InDesign transparency effects to add pizzazz to any project. You'll wind up the lesson making a printable photo cube from a template.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Drawing and Working With Shapes
You might be surprised to learn that InDesign provides you with some of the same sophisticated drawing tools that you'll find in Adobe Illustrator. For example, InDesign offers the Pathfinder tool, which is the perfect tool to use if you need to combine simply drawn shapes and convert them into more complex and interesting objects. In this lesson, you'll learn how to work with some of the drawing tools to design a poster for a fashion show. You'll see how to draw several simple shapes and stack them using blend modes for interesting effects. One of the topics we'll go over is a text wrap, which is a special way to work with a drawing to tell InDesign where you want your text to display on your page. If you've ever wondered how to make text follow the shape of an object, curving around it on the page, our practice today will solve the mystery!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Managing and Applying Color
Did you know that your eyes can see over 16 million different colors? It's true! Fortunately, you don't have to work with that many colors in InDesign. But if you ever find yourself trying to choose between thousands and thousands of color possibilities, you'll understand why InDesign offers you so many different ways to work with your choices. In this lesson, you'll learn the best methods for choosing, naming, and organizing colors. You'll practice working with solid colors as well as gradients (which let you display a range of color within an object), and we'll round out the lesson by using some more special effects in today's fun project—a greeting card.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Designing Tables and Creating Forms
When you need to display bits of information in your publication and want to ensure it's easy to read, it's time to use a table. InDesign offers you lots of tools for designing and formatting tables while helping you make sure your content will coordinate with other documents. You'll see how this works today as we practice building tables for an invoice. You'll also find out how to use color tints in your table, as well as how to create and use styles to quickly and consistently reuse any of your layout features. Finally, we'll experiment with an interactive PDF form. You'll add some fields to a blank form, see how to configure a text field or button, and produce the PDF form.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Storing Text and Color Information

Recycling doesn't just apply to items in your home or business. In this lesson, you'll see how to use the 3Rs of recycling in InDesign to complete a newsletter project. As you recycle and modify colors and styles from previous lessons to create new styles in your newsletter, you'll also reuse a lot of the tools and skills you've used in previous lessons. Learning to effectively use all of InDesign's tools and features in a variety of different ways on many different projects is what it's all about!

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Creating and Distributing a Complex Document
Whether you're designing publications for business, hobbies, social, or community activities, odds are you'll need to share them at some point. InDesign provides many options for exporting and reusing a document, as well as printing. We'll review a few of them today as we design a postcard using special fonts, colors, and image layout features. Have you ever seen text that shows an image of some sort through the letters and wondered how it's done? You'll know after today's lesson! By the time you finish this lesson, you'll know how to export a publication as an image and then place it into a new Web page, print directly from your desktop, or create a compact version of your finished publication ready to email.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Working With Color Separations, Special Layouts, and E-books
In this final lesson, we'll really test InDesign's versatility. First, we'll use a two-color version of the business cards you worked with early in the course and dig into color separations—a common method of preparing a file for a professional print shop. We'll try out special layout tools for producing alternate page layouts of different sizes in the same document. Finally, we'll wind up the course by creating an e-book.

Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows), Adobe CS6 Design and Web Premium (Windows), Adobe CS6 Master Collection (Windows), InDesign CS6 (Mac), Adobe CS6 Design and Web Premium (Mac), Adobe CS6 Master Collection (Mac), or Adobe CC may also be used (Mac or Windows) (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 or Windows 8; Mac OS X v10.6.8, v10.7, or v10.8.

Other requirements: Windows - Intel Pentium 4 or AMD Athlon 64 processor, 2GB of RAM (8GB recommended); Mac OS - PowerPC® G5 or multicore Intel® processor, 2GB of RAM (8GB recommended)


Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Crystal Reports

Introduction to Crystal Reports

$190 + applicable tax

Want to "wow" people with your business reports? In this course, you'll master the techniques the pros use to produce attractive, reader-friendly reports for any audience.  

Designed for Crystal Reports XI, Crystal Reports 2008, and Crystal Reports 2011, this course will teach you how to transform the information that lies buried in your database or accounting program into clear, easy-to-understand documents.

You'll hone your Crystal Reporting skills as you get hands-on practice in extracting, sorting, and grouping your data. In addition, you'll find out how to include totals for groups of figures or for the entire report. Next, you'll master the art of building your reports and formatting your material to create a polished, professional look. 

Whether you're new to Crystal Reports or want to enhance your skills, this course is ideal for you. By the time you're done, you'll be able to produce anything from a quick meeting handout to an elaborate annual report—and you'll never be intimidated by report-writing tasks again!

NOTE: Please check the Requirements tab for important software version information before you sign up for this course. 

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started With Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports is the world's most popular software tool for creating reports based on data stored in databases. It's popular because of its power and flexibility, which will help you create reports that communicate the information you want to convey to the people you want to convey it to. In our first lesson, you'll learn why it's important to find out everything you need to know about the report you want to create before you even launch the Crystal Reports application. This advance planning gives you a much better chance of creating a report that achieves your objectives.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Create a Crystal Report Right Now!
In this lesson, we'll hit the ground running and create a Crystal Report from scratch. From Lesson 1, you already know how to connect to a data source. Today, you'll learn how to pull data from that data source and place it into your report. Then, I'll show you how to use Crystal Reports to create a quick, simple report with a professional appearance—adding headers and footers, and adjusting column headings and the data itself. We'll also discuss how to arrange all of these items on a page for maximum visual impact. By the end of this lesson, you'll know how to create a simple report!

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Pulling Data From Multiple Tables
Once you know how to pull data from a database and display it in a basic report, the next step is to pull data from multiple database tables and display only the data you want, filtering out any irrelevant information. In this lesson, you'll learn how to perform these functions, and I'll also show you how to build reports that allow users to decide at runtime what to display. In effect, you can build one report that serves the purpose of multiple reports!

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Sorting, Grouping, and Drilling Down
Displaying the information in a database is one thing; displaying it in a way that communicates effectively is another. In today's lesson, we'll review how to enhance communication by organizing a report's data in a meaningful way, and you'll learn how to use Crystal Reports to sort data and group related data items together. You'll discover how to summarize numerical data with group totals and how to obtain an overall grand total. And we'll also look into the drill-down capability of Crystal Reports, which allows your report readers to use a simple mouse click to access suppressed details of a specific data group!

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Crystal Reports Formatting Tools
In this lesson, you'll dive into the details of the various report sections. First, we'll discuss how to resize sections, and then we'll take a close look at the Section Expert, which is your major tool for selecting options that control the appearance and function of the various sections of a report. We'll also explore how you can control the placement of groups, reset page numbering, and move report totals. Finally, we'll take a closer look at the drill-down feature and hiding details.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Absolute and Conditional Formatting
Today, you'll get even more hands-on experience formatting a report. First, we'll look at a number of formatting options that Crystal Reports offers to help you give your report just the look you want. Then, we'll look at how you can use report templates to achieve a consistent appearance across a family of reports. And finally, we'll practice using absolute formatting and conditional formatting, features that can adjust the appearance of your report based on the data it contains.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Creating Cross-Tab Reports
With Crystal Reports, you can do more than just display the data you select from your data source. You can also show correlations between related categories of data items. To do this, you create a cross-tab report, which can show such correlations across the entire data set or within a selected group of data items. As usual, Crystal Reports provides considerable flexibility in how it presents the cross-tab data to users. In this lesson, you'll learn what the options are and how to use them.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Creating Reports to Show Top and Bottom Performers
You'll often need to create a report based on some, but not all, of the data in a database. For example, a sales manager may want to look only at the purchase records of her top five customers. Alternatively, she may want to view the performance of her bottom 10 salespeople. Crystal Reports makes it easy to produce such reports, as well as others that are selective about what they display. In this lesson, you'll create such targeted reports that make it easy for managers to make informed decisions.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Crystal Reports Formulas
The formulas and control structures in Crystal Reports allow you to make your reports dynamic, sensitive to what's happening at runtime. With formulas, you can operate on data and put the result into your report. You can also save time and effort by including one or more of the predefined functions in your formulas. You can even create your own custom functions, save them, and use them both now and in the future. These facilities give you the flexibility to produce a sophisticated custom report with very little time and effort. And you'll find out how to do all of this in today's lesson.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Adding Subreports to a Main Report
Crystal Reports gives you the ability to embed one report inside another. The two reports can be related in some way, or they can be completely unrelated. As long as you have a reason for displaying both reports at once, you can do it, and you'll find out how in today's lesson. We'll also practice embedding hyperlinks today. This can be a great alternative to embedding a subreport within a main report!

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Communicating With Charts
Charts and maps can add visual dimension to the display of information in a report. While columns of numbers may be an effective way to present data for some readers, you may have visual learners in your target audience who would be better served by charts and maps. Today, you'll learn how to choose a chart type that best conveys the information you want to emphasize. And you'll find out how to use color, font, scale, legends, and titles to help you highlight trends in the data or data points that fall outside of the expected range.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Publishing a Crystal Report
After you've created a report, you need to distribute it. Crystal Reports gives you several convenient distribution options, and we'll explore all of these in our final lesson. We'll talk about print and fax options, exporting a report to any of a number of popular file formats, and transmitting it to the people who should read it. You'll learn how to post the report on your organization's intranet or the Web, and then we'll discuss distributing reports via Crystal Reports Viewer 2008.
You will need Crystal Reports XI, Crystal Reports 2008, Crystal Reports 2011, or Crystal Reports 2013. (Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.) You will also need Microsoft Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, or 10.

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Note:  This course was written for Crystal Reports 2008.  Crystal Reports XI, Crystal Reports 2008, or Crystal Reports 2011 are all acceptable for this course.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to QuickBooks 2015

Introduction to QuickBooks 2015

$190 + applicable tax

Learn to manage the financial aspects of your small business quickly and efficiently with this powerful accounting software program. QuickBooks is designed especially for the small- to midsized-business owner who needs a fully functional accounting system that's also easy to use.

In 12 lessons, you'll gain hands-on experience as you master the tools you need set up a chart of accounts; reconcile your checking account; create and print invoices, receipts, and statements; track your payables, inventory, and receivables; create estimates; and generate reports.

Whether you're new to QuickBooks or have already used earlier versions of this accounting software program, this course will empower you to take control of the financial accounting for your business.

Benefits of Instructor-Led Courses:

  • Two lessons are released each week, so you never feel overwhelmed with your workload
  • Access an expert instructor to reinforce your learning and get feedback
  • Learn from your peers and engage in weekly discussion forums

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started
In our first lesson, you'll become familiar with the QuickBooks interface. You'll find out how the pros use QuickBooks to simultaneously manage common accounting tasks for multiple companies, you'll get to set up a QuickBooks Company of your very own, and you'll learn some QuickBooks terminology.

We'll be practicing many new skills in this class, so it's important that you have a copy of QuickBooks installed on your computer before you begin.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

The Chart of Accounts
The Chart of Accounts is the heart and soul of QuickBooks. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to take fullest advantage of this powerful tool to add, edit, and access accounts that you can use to track the value of your business or monitor your income and expenses.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Company Lists
Today, we'll learn how to use company lists in QuickBooks to gather and organize all of the information you'll need to properly conduct your business. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll know how to store and retrieve all manner of useful facts, including data on customers, vendors, products, services, important events, and more.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Bank Accounts
Today, you'll become comfortable working with bank accounts in QuickBooks. You'll learn how to tell QuickBooks about checks, withdrawals, and transfers between accounts. You'll get firsthand experience with adding, finding, and editing or voiding all manner of checking and savings account transactions. You'll even be prepared to reconcile your QuickBooks checking account with your monthly bank statement to ensure that no errors were made.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Fixed Assets and Depreciation
The physical objects you rely on to help you run your business (like furniture, machinery, vehicles, computers, telephones, or even the building that houses your business) all have significant value. The total value of these assets has a direct impact on the overall worth of your business, and there are tax implications if you sell an asset or if its value changes. That's why it's important for you to keep an accurate tally of everything your business owns. Today's lesson will provide you with plenty of opportunities to do just that.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Accounts Payable I
Without an organized system for managing all the bills your business receives, they can really start to stack up. And when bills pile up, it isn't hard to overlook one or two from time to time. That, of course, can result in late fees and credit difficulties. Today, you'll learn how to use QuickBooks to make sure you're paying all of your bills right on time—not too early, and not too late.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Accounts Payable II
Today, we're going to finish our discussion of QuickBooks' accounts payable tools. You'll learn how to get QuickBooks to memorize bills that you find yourself paying over and over again, month after month. Then, you'll learn how to create some useful accounts payable reports.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Accounts Receivable I
You'll find today's lesson useful if your business ever finds itself required to collect payment from a customer long after the products or services have been delivered. Today is the day you'll get some hands-on experience with invoicing. You'll find out how to create an invoice, fill it with invoice items, edit it, print it, and even email it to your customers.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Accounts Receivable II
Okay, so you've created an invoice and delivered it to your customer. With a little bit of luck, your customer will place the invoice on his or her "to-do" list and, eventually, you'll receive some form of payment for your troubles. Now what? You'll find out in today's lesson.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Accounts Receivable III
Today, we'll explore some useful customer-related reports that can help you keep track of exactly who owes you what. Then, you'll learn what to do if you ever incur a charge on behalf of a customer and wish to be reimbursed for that expense.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Inventory and Estimating
Today, you're going to learn how to customize your QuickBooks invoices to give them a more professional look. You'll also learn how to work with two of QuickBooks' more advanced features: inventory tracking and estimating.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Reporting
In our final lesson, you'll find out how to create, use, and memorize a wide variety of useful reports that can help you locate, organize, sort, total, summarize, and otherwise make sense of all those transactions you've painstakingly entered into QuickBooks.

QuickBooks Pro 2015 or QuickBooks Premier Edition 2015 (please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7, 8, Vista, or XP.

The Enterprise version of the software can also be used for this course; however this course is not suitable for Macintosh users, nor for users of QuickBooks Online or QuickBooks SimpleStart.

Note: While this course is based on the U.S. version of QuickBooks, users of the Canadian and Australian versions will be supported in the Discussion Areas.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to QuickBooks 2016

Introduction to QuickBooks 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Learn to manage the financial aspects of your small business quickly and efficiently with this powerful accounting software program. QuickBooks is designed especially for the small- to midsized-business owner who needs a fully functional accounting system that's also easy to use.

In 12 lessons, you'll gain hands-on experience as you master the tools you need set up a chart of accounts; reconcile your checking account; create and print invoices, receipts, and statements; track your payables, inventory, and receivables; create estimates; and generate reports.

Whether you're new to QuickBooks or have already used earlier versions of this accounting software program, this course will empower you to take control of the financial accounting for your business.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started

In our first lesson, you'll become familiar with the QuickBooks interface. You'll find out how the pros use QuickBooks to simultaneously manage common accounting tasks for multiple companies, you'll get to set up a QuickBooks Company of your very own, and you'll learn some QuickBooks terminology.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

The Chart of Accounts
The Chart of Accounts is the heart and soul of QuickBooks. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to take fullest advantage of this powerful tool to add, edit, and access accounts that you can use to track the value of your business or monitor your income and expenses.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Company Lists
Today, we'll learn how to use company lists in QuickBooks to gather and organize all of the information you'll need to properly conduct your business. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll know how to store and retrieve all manner of useful facts, including data on customers, vendors, products, services, important events, and more.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Bank Accounts
Today, you'll become comfortable working with bank accounts in QuickBooks. You'll learn how to tell QuickBooks about checks, withdrawals, and transfers between accounts. You'll get firsthand experience with adding, finding, and editing or voiding all manner of checking and savings account transactions. You'll even be prepared to reconcile your QuickBooks checking account with your monthly bank statement to ensure that no errors were made.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Fixed Assets and Depreciation
The physical objects you rely on to help you run your business (like furniture, machinery, vehicles, computers, telephones, or even the building that houses your business) all have significant value. The total value of these assets has a direct impact on the overall worth of your business, and there are tax implications if you sell an asset or if its value changes. That's why it's important for you to keep an accurate tally of everything your business owns. Today's lesson will provide you with plenty of opportunities to do just that.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Accounts Payable I
Without an organized system for managing all the bills your business receives, they can really start to stack up. And when bills pile up, it isn't hard to overlook one or two from time to time. That, of course, can result in late fees and credit difficulties. Today, you'll learn how to use QuickBooks to make sure you're paying all of your bills right on time—not too early, and not too late.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Accounts Payable II
Today, we're going to finish our discussion of QuickBooks' accounts payable tools. You'll learn how to get QuickBooks to memorize bills that you find yourself paying over and over again, month after month. Then, you'll learn how to create some useful accounts payable reports.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Accounts Receivable I
You'll find today's lesson useful if your business ever finds itself required to collect payment from a customer long after the products or services have been delivered. Today is the day you'll get some hands-on experience with invoicing. You'll find out how to create an invoice, fill it with invoice items, edit it, print it, and even email it to your customers.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Accounts Receivable II
Okay, so you've created an invoice and delivered it to your customer. With a little bit of luck, your customer will place the invoice on his or her "to-do" list and, eventually, you'll receive some form of payment for your troubles. Now what? You'll find out in today's lesson.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Accounts Receivable III
Today, we'll explore some useful customer-related reports that can help you keep track of exactly who owes you what. Then, you'll learn what to do if you ever incur a charge on behalf of a customer and wish to be reimbursed for that expense.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Inventory and Estimating
Today, you're going to learn how to customize your QuickBooks invoices to give them a more professional look. You'll also learn how to work with two of QuickBooks' more advanced features: inventory tracking and estimating.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Reporting
In our final lesson, you'll find out how to create, use, and memorize a wide variety of useful reports that can help you locate, organize, sort, total, summarize, and otherwise make sense of all those transactions you've painstakingly entered into QuickBooks

QuickBooks Pro 2016 or QuickBooks Premier Edition 2016 (please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7, 8, 10  Vista or XP.

The Enterprise version of the software can also be used for this course; however this course is not suitable for Macintosh users, nor for users of QuickBooks Online or QuickBooks SimpleStart.

Note: While this course is based on the U.S. version of QuickBooks, users of the Canadian and Australian versions will be supported in the Discussion Areas to the extent possible.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to QuickBooks 2017

Introduction to QuickBooks 2017

$190 + applicable tax

Learn to manage the financial aspects of your small business quickly and efficiently with this powerful accounting software program. QuickBooks is designed especially for the small- to midsized-business owner who needs a fully functional accounting system that's also easy to use.

In 12 lessons, you'll gain hands-on experience as you master the tools you need set up a chart of accounts; reconcile your checking account; create and print invoices, receipts, and statements; track your payables, inventory, and receivables; create estimates; and generate reports.

Whether you're new to QuickBooks or have already used earlier versions of this accounting software program, this course will empower you to take control of the financial accounting for your business.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started

In our first lesson, you'll become familiar with the QuickBooks interface. You'll find out how the pros use QuickBooks to simultaneously manage common accounting tasks for multiple companies, you'll get to set up a QuickBooks Company of your very own, and you'll learn some QuickBooks terminology.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

The Chart of Accounts
The Chart of Accounts is the heart and soul of QuickBooks. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to take fullest advantage of this powerful tool to add, edit, and access accounts that you can use to track the value of your business or monitor your income and expenses.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Company Lists
Today, we'll learn how to use company lists in QuickBooks to gather and organize all of the information you'll need to properly conduct your business. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll know how to store and retrieve all manner of useful facts, including data on customers, vendors, products, services, important events, and more.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Bank Accounts
Today, you'll become comfortable working with bank accounts in QuickBooks. You'll learn how to tell QuickBooks about checks, withdrawals, and transfers between accounts. You'll get firsthand experience with adding, finding, and editing or voiding all manner of checking and savings account transactions. You'll even be prepared to reconcile your QuickBooks checking account with your monthly bank statement to ensure that no errors were made.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Fixed Assets and Depreciation
The physical objects you rely on to help you run your business (like furniture, machinery, vehicles, computers, telephones, or even the building that houses your business) all have significant value. The total value of these assets has a direct impact on the overall worth of your business, and there are tax implications if you sell an asset or if its value changes. That's why it's important for you to keep an accurate tally of everything your business owns. Today's lesson will provide you with plenty of opportunities to do just that.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Accounts Payable I
Without an organized system for managing all the bills your business receives, they can really start to stack up. And when bills pile up, it isn't hard to overlook one or two from time to time. That, of course, can result in late fees and credit difficulties. Today, you'll learn how to use QuickBooks to make sure you're paying all of your bills right on time—not too early, and not too late.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Accounts Payable II
Today, we're going to finish our discussion of QuickBooks' accounts payable tools. You'll learn how to get QuickBooks to memorize bills that you find yourself paying over and over again, month after month. Then, you'll learn how to create some useful accounts payable reports.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Accounts Receivable I
You'll find today's lesson useful if your business ever finds itself required to collect payment from a customer long after the products or services have been delivered. Today is the day you'll get some hands-on experience with invoicing. You'll find out how to create an invoice, fill it with invoice items, edit it, print it, and even email it to your customers.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Accounts Receivable II
Okay, so you've created an invoice and delivered it to your customer. With a little bit of luck, your customer will place the invoice on his or her "to-do" list and, eventually, you'll receive some form of payment for your troubles. Now what? You'll find out in today's lesson.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Accounts Receivable III
Today, we'll explore some useful customer-related reports that can help you keep track of exactly who owes you what. Then, you'll learn what to do if you ever incur a charge on behalf of a customer and wish to be reimbursed for that expense.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Inventory and Estimating
Today, you're going to learn how to customize your QuickBooks invoices to give them a more professional look. You'll also learn how to work with two of QuickBooks' more advanced features: inventory tracking and estimating.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Reporting
In our final lesson, you'll find out how to create, use, and memorize a wide variety of useful reports that can help you locate, organize, sort, total, summarize, and otherwise make sense of all those transactions you've painstakingly entered into QuickBooks

QuickBooks Pro 2017 or QuickBooks Premier Edition 2017 (please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7, 8, 10 or Vista.

The Enterprise version of the software can also be used for this course; however this course is not suitable for Macintosh users, nor for users of QuickBooks Online or QuickBooks SimpleStart.

Note: While this course is based on the U.S. version of QuickBooks, users of the Canadian and Australian versions will be supported in the Discussion Areas to the extent possible.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate QuickBooks 2016

Intermediate QuickBooks 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Learning how to use QuickBooks to its full potential goes beyond learning the program's basic features.  Even experienced QuickBooks users struggle when applying certain business situations to QuickBooks.  In this course, we'll go beyond the basics as you master QuickBooks' more advanced features and applications. 

You'll learn to manage multiple company files, export and import list data from one file to another, and make journal entries.  If your business handles inventory, you'll learn how to enter price levels and track discounts and credits.  You'll even learn how to track mileage on vehicles you use in your business.

This course also covers many other common topics that small business owners encounter, including creating customer statements, assessing finance charges on overdue balances, using QuickBooks' batch invoicing features to create multiple invoices, and writing off past due balances when the customer won't pay.

Finally, you'll learn how to enter common owner transactions, including when the owner takes money out of the business or invests new capital.  You'll even learn how to deal with those difficult situations where you may pay for a business transaction using personal cash.  The course concludes with a discussion of how to track loans and use the budgeting feature to better plan and control your business. 

This course is designed for those who already have a good grasp on the basics of this program or have successfully completed the Introduction to QuickBooks course.  Whether you're a small-business owner, or bookkeeper or accountant needing a QuickBooks refresher, this course will make you more confident and secure in accounting for your business.      

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Working With Company Files
One of the more challenging aspects of QuickBooks is learning how to manage company files. In this lesson, we'll explore some great features that will allow you to easily work with not just one, but multiple company files. You'll even learn how to export and import list information from other files into a brand new file. Once you have a new file created, you'll learn how to move your file from one computer to another and send your file to your accountant.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Securing Your Company Files
Taking steps to secure your company files is one of the easiest and most effective ways to make sure your file doesn't get mishandled or corrupted in some way. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to set a closing date in your file so that no one can enter a transaction in the wrong period. You'll also learn how to create new users and limit these users to only the areas in which they work. Finally, you'll learn how to use the Condense and Verify features in QuickBooks to streamline your file and check to see if it's corrupted.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

List Items and Inventory
Lists form the backbone of QuickBooks. In this lesson, you'll explore how to add and edit multiple list items. You'll also learn how to create class items to further categorize transactions. Finally, you'll discover how to enter inventory part items and how to combine these items to build inventory assemblies.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Ordering and Selling Inventory
Tracking inventory in QuickBooks is a multi-step process. In this lesson, you'll learn how to enter and use Sales Orders to keep track of customer orders. We'll go over how to create Purchase Orders that you can either print or email to your vendors to order more inventory when you need it. And to help you keep track of it all, we'll discuss how to use the Inventory Center in QuickBooks to quickly view inventory transactions, edit items, and produce some amazing reports.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Vendor Discounts and Credits and Adjusting Inventory
If you work with the same vendors over and over again, you may receive discounts and earn credits. In this lesson, you'll learn how to record these discounts. You'll also learn how to enter and manage vendor credits when they arise. Finally, you'll gain the skills you need to adjust your inventory balance should it get out of sync with your actual in-stock inventory.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Tracking Price Levels and Customer Discounts
Not all customers are created equal. Many businesses charge different prices to different customers for a number of reasons. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create price levels either on a fixed percentage or on an item basis that you can assign to a particular customer. This way, whenever you create an invoice for a customer, QuickBooks automatically remembers the price that you want to charge. You'll also learn how to create discount items that you can use separately to track the total amount of discounts that you grant to your customers, and even how to use discounts to encourage your customers to pay an invoice early.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Tracking Vehicle Mileage
If you ever have to travel by car to a job site or project, you may want to track the vehicle mileage so that you can later deduct it on your tax return. In this lesson, you'll learn how to enter this mileage and the rate the IRS allows for a deduction. You'll also learn how to create some great reports that you can use as support for your tax return. Last, you'll find out how to bill a customer for the mileage you've incurred, even if it's at a different rate than the IRS allows.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Working With Customer Balances
Sometimes you may need to bill a customer without the need to create a full-blown invoice or sales receipt. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create a statement charge directly to a customer's account. You'll also learn how to easily change the price of multiple sales items using QuickBooks' Change Item Prices feature. Last, if a customer is late to pay on an invoice, you'll learn how to assess a finance charge and how to write the balance off the books if the customer ultimately fails to pay.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Batch Invoicing and Creating Letters
In this lesson, you'll learn how to utilize QuickBooks' batch invoicing features to create multiple invoices at the same time to send to any of your customers on your customer list. You'll also learn how to set up billing groups that you can use over and over again to send recurring invoices. In the second half of the lesson, you'll explore how to modify a letter template and then create a form letter that you can send to your customers or vendors. You'll even learn how to create and print envelopes and labels based on your customer or vendor information.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Petty Cash and Gift Cards
Most small businesses carry a small amount of cash on hand to pay for odds and ends. Over time, these small amounts can have a significant impact on your accounting records. In this lesson, you'll learn how you can use QuickBooks to track petty cash amounts. In addition, you're going to learn how to enter the sales of gift cards and certificates. You'll also become proficient in making entries to record when a customer redeems one of these gift cards or certificates.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Owner Transactions and Journal Entries
In this lesson, you'll learn how to record an owner's infusion of capital into the business. You'll also learn how to record transactions where the owner withdraws money from the company's bank account. In addition, you'll examine when and how to use the Make General Journal Entries window to record various entries that don't involve the business bank account, including the times when the owner might use personal funds to pay for a business expense.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Loans and Budgets
In this lesson, you'll learn how to enter a long-term loan in which you use the proceeds of the loan to purchase an asset in your business. You'll then learn how to track this loan using the Loan Manager feature to split apart the principal and interest portions of the loan payment. We'll also dive into the planning and budgeting features built into QuickBooks. By the end of this lesson, you'll see just how easy it is to enter budget data so that you can later evaluate your company's performance using some of QuickBooks' reporting features.
QuickBooks Pro 2016 or QuickBooks Premier Edition 2016 (please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7, 8, 10  Vista or XP.

The Enterprise version of the software can also be used for this course; however this course is not suitable for Macintosh users, nor for users of QuickBooks Online or QuickBooks SimpleStart.

Note: While this course is based on the U.S. version of QuickBooks, users of the Canadian and Australian versions will be supported in the Discussion Areas to the extent possible.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate QuickBooks 2017

Intermediate QuickBooks 2017

$190 + applicable tax

Learning how to use QuickBooks to its full potential goes beyond learning the program's basic features.  Even experienced QuickBooks users struggle when applying certain business situations to QuickBooks.  In this course, we'll go beyond the basics as you master QuickBooks' more advanced features and applications. 

You'll learn to manage multiple company files, export and import list data from one file to another, and make journal entries.  If your business handles inventory, you'll learn how to enter price levels and track discounts and credits.  You'll even learn how to track mileage on vehicles you use in your business.

This course also covers many other common topics that small business owners encounter, including creating customer statements, assessing finance charges on overdue balances, using QuickBooks' batch invoicing features to create multiple invoices, and writing off past due balances when the customer won't pay.

Finally, you'll learn how to enter common owner transactions, including when the owner takes money out of the business or invests new capital.  You'll even learn how to deal with those difficult situations where you may pay for a business transaction using personal cash.  The course concludes with a discussion of how to track loans and use the budgeting feature to better plan and control your business. 

This course is designed for those who already have a good grasp on the basics of this program or have successfully completed the Introduction to QuickBooks course.  Whether you're a small-business owner, or bookkeeper or accountant needing a QuickBooks refresher, this course will make you more confident and secure in accounting for your business.      

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Working With Company Files
One of the more challenging aspects of QuickBooks is learning how to manage company files. In this lesson, we'll explore some great features that will allow you to easily work with not just one, but multiple company files. You'll even learn how to export and import list information from other files into a brand new file. Once you have a new file created, you'll learn how to move your file from one computer to another and send your file to your accountant.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Securing Your Company Files
Taking steps to secure your company files is one of the easiest and most effective ways to make sure your file doesn't get mishandled or corrupted in some way. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to set a closing date in your file so that no one can enter a transaction in the wrong period. You'll also learn how to create new users and limit these users to only the areas in which they work. Finally, you'll learn how to use the Condense and Verify features in QuickBooks to streamline your file and check to see if it's corrupted.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

List Items and Inventory
Lists form the backbone of QuickBooks. In this lesson, you'll explore how to add and edit multiple list items. You'll also learn how to create class items to further categorize transactions. Finally, you'll discover how to enter inventory part items and how to combine these items to build inventory assemblies.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Ordering and Selling Inventory
Tracking inventory in QuickBooks is a multi-step process. In this lesson, you'll learn how to enter and use Sales Orders to keep track of customer orders. We'll go over how to create Purchase Orders that you can either print or email to your vendors to order more inventory when you need it. And to help you keep track of it all, we'll discuss how to use the Inventory Center in QuickBooks to quickly view inventory transactions, edit items, and produce some amazing reports.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Vendor Discounts and Credits and Adjusting Inventory
If you work with the same vendors over and over again, you may receive discounts and earn credits. In this lesson, you'll learn how to record these discounts. You'll also learn how to enter and manage vendor credits when they arise. Finally, you'll gain the skills you need to adjust your inventory balance should it get out of sync with your actual in-stock inventory.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Tracking Price Levels and Customer Discounts
Not all customers are created equal. Many businesses charge different prices to different customers for a number of reasons. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create price levels either on a fixed percentage or on an item basis that you can assign to a particular customer. This way, whenever you create an invoice for a customer, QuickBooks automatically remembers the price that you want to charge. You'll also learn how to create discount items that you can use separately to track the total amount of discounts that you grant to your customers, and even how to use discounts to encourage your customers to pay an invoice early.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Tracking Vehicle Mileage
If you ever have to travel by car to a job site or project, you may want to track the vehicle mileage so that you can later deduct it on your tax return. In this lesson, you'll learn how to enter this mileage and the rate the IRS allows for a deduction. You'll also learn how to create some great reports that you can use as support for your tax return. Last, you'll find out how to bill a customer for the mileage you've incurred, even if it's at a different rate than the IRS allows.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Working With Customer Balances
Sometimes you may need to bill a customer without the need to create a full-blown invoice or sales receipt. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create a statement charge directly to a customer's account. You'll also learn how to easily change the price of multiple sales items using QuickBooks' Change Item Prices feature. Last, if a customer is late to pay on an invoice, you'll learn how to assess a finance charge and how to write the balance off the books if the customer ultimately fails to pay.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Batch Invoicing and Creating Letters
In this lesson, you'll learn how to utilize QuickBooks' batch invoicing features to create multiple invoices at the same time to send to any of your customers on your customer list. You'll also learn how to set up billing groups that you can use over and over again to send recurring invoices. In the second half of the lesson, you'll explore how to modify a letter template and then create a form letter that you can send to your customers or vendors. You'll even learn how to create and print envelopes and labels based on your customer or vendor information.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Petty Cash and Gift Cards
Most small businesses carry a small amount of cash on hand to pay for odds and ends. Over time, these small amounts can have a significant impact on your accounting records. In this lesson, you'll learn how you can use QuickBooks to track petty cash amounts. In addition, you're going to learn how to enter the sales of gift cards and certificates. You'll also become proficient in making entries to record when a customer redeems one of these gift cards or certificates.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Owner Transactions and Journal Entries
In this lesson, you'll learn how to record an owner's infusion of capital into the business. You'll also learn how to record transactions where the owner withdraws money from the company's bank account. In addition, you'll examine when and how to use the Make General Journal Entries window to record various entries that don't involve the business bank account, including the times when the owner might use personal funds to pay for a business expense.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Loans and Budgets
In this lesson, you'll learn how to enter a long-term loan in which you use the proceeds of the loan to purchase an asset in your business. You'll then learn how to track this loan using the Loan Manager feature to split apart the principal and interest portions of the loan payment. We'll also dive into the planning and budgeting features built into QuickBooks. By the end of this lesson, you'll see just how easy it is to enter budget data so that you can later evaluate your company's performance using some of QuickBooks' reporting features.

The desktop version of QuickBooks Premier Edition 2017 is recommended for this course (please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7, 8, 10 or Vista. QuickBooks Pro 2017 can be used for this course, but please be aware that there are some features discussed in the course that are not available in the Pro edition.  However, the course lessons have been modified to accommodate Pro version users.

The Enterprise version of the software can also be used for this course. However, this course is not suitable for Macintosh users, nor for users of QuickBooks Online or QuickBooks SimpleStart.

This course is designed for those QuickBooks users that already feel that they have a good grasp on the basics or have successfully completed the Introduction to QuickBooks course. 

Note: While this course is based on the U.S. version of QuickBooks, users of the Canadian and Australian versions will be supported in the Discussion Areas to the extent possible.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Access 2010

Introduction to Microsoft Access 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Take control over your data! Whether you're a novice or an experienced database user, this course will show you how to harness the full power of Microsoft Access 2010. 

In these practical and project-oriented lessons, you'll learn how to use this award-winning MS Office software to create and customize tables. You'll build relationships between your tables to eliminate redundancies and slash data entry time. And you'll discover how to achieve huge reductions in data entry errors by setting default values, creating validation rules, and building input masks.  

In addition, you'll find out how to make your database more user-friendly with custom data entry forms, smart lists, and other sophisticated controls. You'll learn how to retrieve exactly what you need from your database with powerful queries and reports, and you'll even start automating routine tasks with labor-saving macros. 

By the time you've finished this course, you'll know how to create an effective database for any information you need to store, document, and manage—at home or on the job.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting to Know Access 2010
In this lesson, you’ll find out what Access is and how individuals, businesses, and organizations use it to store information. You’ll begin to build an Access database . . . including all the components that turn a list of records into reports, forms, and queries. We’ll start by opening the application and creating a new database.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Controlling Your Access Table Fields
It’s time to lay down the law! Today you’ll impose rules that automatically fill an Access table field with a preset value or that automatically insert the symbols commonly included in phone numbers. Also, you’ll set up rules that require allow only certain kinds of data in certain fields. With just a few minutes of work, you can make data entry simpler, clearer, and practically error-free.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating Tables and Relationships
Today you’ll create additional tables for our class database, customizing them along the way, and then build relationships between them. This all paves the way for later database features, such as reports, queries, and forms that draw from multiple tables in the database.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Building Powerful Forms
In this lesson, you’ll use forms for data entry and for viewing records in your tables. You’ll meet the Form Wizard, which makes form building fast and easy and which allows you to select one or more tables’ fields to include. You’ll also determine form layout.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Adding Versatility to Forms
In this lesson, you’ll add buttons and controls to forms. You’ll also adjust table relationships to support the creation of multi-table forms . . . which paves the way to creating queries and reports that draw data from more than one table.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Interviewing Your Database
Using queries to sort, filter, and search your database is one of the most important skills you’ll master in this course. In this lesson, you’ll create queries that search for specific data. You’ll also customize how Access displays that data. You’ll follow instructions step by step, so you gain confidence with the process; then I’ll turn you loose to create a query on your own.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Taking Queries to the Next Level
A query that puts specific records in order or finds all the records that have a general piece of information in common is, well, pretty common. Being able to create that kind of query is a great foundation skill, but it won’t help you find a very specific record. Nor will it let you search for records within a span of dates or other numeric values. It also won’t help you exclude certain records, reducing a large pool of data to just those records you need to see. In this lesson, you’ll create queries that give you true power to search your database.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Multi-Table Query Control
In this lesson, you’ll learn to plan, build, and use queries that pull data from more than one table at a time. This gives you more power over your data and allows you to build a great foundation for truly customized reports.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Reporting on Your Tables
Reports are easy to create and to customize. In this lesson, you’ll build a simple report using the Report Wizard. Then you’ll change the report’s appearance, using layout view and design view. These skills provide the foundation to create and design any report you may need, on any data in your database.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Creating Query-Based Reports
In this lesson, you’ll create reports that are based on the results of queries you create to sort and filter your database. Because queries can combine data from multiple tables, filter for specific data, and sort the results, your report reflects just the data that meet the query’s criteria. This makes truly customized reporting possible—and quite simple.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Mastering Report Design
In this lesson, you’ll plan and create a completely customized report, using a specialized query that controls which data the report includes. You’ll add fields that perform calculations on your data. You’ll customize your report’s layout, too, using design view’s many tools for controlling the structure and appearance of your data.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Automating Your Database With Macros
Building macros (short programs that perform a series of steps) helps you speed up and create consistency in your more repetitive Access tasks. From opening a form to running a report to building a new record in a table, macros eliminate redundant procedures by turning them into something you can do with one click.
Microsoft Access 2010, (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8.

 

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Access 2016

Introduction to Microsoft Access 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Take control of your data! In this course, you'll learn how to harness the power of Microsoft Access 2016 to organize, store, edit, manage, and report on hundreds of thousands of records.

You'll start with the basics of database concepts and structure, and learn to build and customize tables to store data. With that foundation in place, you'll then learn about relational databases, and see how you can use them to build forms, generate reports, and search for data with queries across thousands of records in hundreds of tables—often with just a few clicks of your mouse! You'll also discover how to use macros to automate repetitive tasks and increase your efficiency.

Through easy-to-follow, step-by-step instructions, this course will help you master Access and put it to creative, confident use. You'll develop not only strong Access skills, but a solid understanding of good database design concepts. By the time you've finished the course, you'll know how to organize and assemble an effective database for any kind of information you need to store, document, and manage.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting to Know Access 2016
In this lesson, you'll find out what Access is and how individuals, businesses, and organizations use it to store information. You'll begin to build an Access database . . . including all the components that turn a list of records into reports, forms, and queries. We'll start by opening the application and creating a new database.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Controlling Your Access Table Fields
It's time to lay down the law! Today you'll impose rules that automatically fill an Access table field with a preset value or that automatically insert the symbols commonly included in phone numbers. Also, you'll set up rules that require allow only certain kinds of data in certain fields. With just a few minutes of work, you can make data entry simpler, clearer, and practically error-free.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating Tables and Relationships
Today you'll create additional tables for our class database, customizing them along the way, and then build relationships between them. This all paves the way for later database features, such as reports, queries, and forms that draw from multiple tables in the database.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Building Powerful Forms
In this lesson, you'll use forms for data entry and for viewing records in your tables. You'll meet the Form Wizard, which makes form building fast and easy and which allows you to select one or more tables' fields to include. You'll also determine form layout.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Adding Versatility to Forms
In this lesson, you'll add buttons and controls to forms. You'll also adjust table relationships to support the creation of multi-table forms . . . which paves the way to creating queries and reports that draw data from more than one table.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Interviewing Your Database
Using queries to sort, filter, and search your database is one of the most important skills you'll master in this course. In this lesson, you'll create queries that search for specific data. You'll also customize how Access displays that data. You'll follow instructions step by step so you gain confidence with the process. Then I'll turn you loose to create a query on your own.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Taking Queries to the Next Level
A query that puts specific records in order or finds all the records that have a general piece of information in common is, well, pretty common. Being able to create that kind of query is a great foundation skill, but it won't help you find a very specific record. Nor will it let you search for records within a span of dates or other numeric values. It also won't help you exclude certain records, reducing a large pool of data to just those records you need to see. In this lesson, you'll create queries that give you true power to search your database.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Multi-Table Query Control
In this lesson, you'll learn to plan, build, and use queries that pull data from more than one table at a time. This gives you more power over your data and allows you to build a great foundation for truly customized reports.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Reporting on Your Tables
Reports are easy to create and to customize. In this lesson, you'll build a simple report using the Report Wizard. Then you'll change the report's appearance, using layout view and design view. These skills provide the foundation to create and design any report you may need on any data in your database.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Creating Query-Based Reports
In this lesson, you'll create reports that are based on the results of queries you create to sort and filter your database. Because queries can combine data from multiple tables, filter for specific data, and sort the results, your report reflects just the data that meet the query's criteria. This makes truly customized reporting possible—and quite simple.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Mastering Report Design
In this lesson, you'll plan and create a completely customized report, using a specialized query that controls which data the report includes. You'll add fields that perform calculations on your data. You'll customize your report's layout, too, using design view's many tools for controlling the structure and appearance of your data.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Automating Your Database With Macros
Building macros (short programs that perform a series of steps) helps you speed up and create consistency in your more repetitive Access tasks. From opening a form to running a report to building a new record in a table, macros eliminate redundant procedures by turning them into something you can do with one click.
Microsoft Access 2016 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.)
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Access 2019/Office 365

Introduction to Microsoft Access 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Virtually every industry can benefit from the use of Microsoft Access to organize, store, and document their essential information. Data ranging from inventory and customer information to orders details and vendors can be effectively organized with Microsoft’s longstanding software. If you work with databases of any kind, learning how to use Access 2019 will add a valuable skill set to your professional profile. 

This course will teach you one of the most useful skills for both jobseekers and those looking for promotion. If you know how to use Microsoft Excel, learning Access informs and enhances your current skill set, allowing you to take a stronger role in database management.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting to Know Access 2019
In this lesson, you'll find out what Access is and how individuals, businesses, and organizations use it to store information. You'll begin to build an Access database . . . including all the components that turn a list of records into reports, forms, and queries. We'll start by opening the application and creating a new database.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Controlling Your Access Table Fields
It's time to lay down the law! Today you'll impose rules that automatically fill an Access table field with a preset value or that automatically insert the symbols commonly included in phone numbers. Also, you'll set up rules that require allow only certain kinds of data in certain fields. With just a few minutes of work, you can make data entry simpler, clearer, and practically error-free.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating Tables and Relationships
You'll create additional tables for our class database, customizing them along the way, and then build relationships between them. This all paves the way for later database features, such as reports, queries, and forms that draw from multiple tables in the database.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Building Powerful Forms
In this lesson, you'll use forms for data entry and for viewing records in your tables. You'll meet the Form Wizard, which makes form building fast and easy and which allows you to select one or more tables' fields to include. You'll also determine form layout.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Adding Versatility to Forms
In this lesson, you'll add buttons and controls to forms. You'll also adjust table relationships to support the creation of multi-table forms . . . which paves the way to creating queries and reports that draw data from more than one table.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Interviewing Your Database
Using queries to sort, filter, and search your database is one of the most important skills you'll master in this course. In this lesson, you'll create queries that search for specific data. You'll also customize how Access displays that data. You'll follow instructions step by step, so you gain confidence with the process. Then I'll turn you loose to create a query on your own.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Taking Queries to the Next Level
A query that puts specific records in order or finds all the records that have a general piece of information in common is, well, pretty common. Being able to create that kind of query is a great foundation skill, but it won't help you find a very specific record. Nor will it let you search for records within a span of dates or other numeric values. It also won't help you exclude certain records, reducing a large pool of data to just those records you need to see. In this lesson, you'll create queries that give you true power to search your database.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Multi-Table Query Control
In this lesson, you'll learn to plan, build, and use queries that pull data from more than one table at a time. This gives you more power over your data and allows you to build a great foundation for truly customized reports.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Reporting on Your Tables
Reports are easy to create and to customize. In this lesson, you'll build a simple report using the Report Wizard. Then you'll change the report's appearance, using layout view and design view. These skills provide the foundation to create and design any report you may need on any data in your database.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Creating Query-Based Reports
In this lesson, you'll create reports that are based on the results of queries you create to sort and filter your database. Because queries can combine data from multiple tables, filter for specific data, and sort the results, your report reflects just the data that meet the query's criteria. This makes truly customized reporting possible—and quite simple.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Mastering Report Design
In this lesson, you'll plan and create a completely customized report, using a specialized query that controls which data the report includes. You'll add fields that perform calculations on your data. You'll customize your report's layout, too, using design view's many tools for controlling the structure and appearance of your data.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Automating Your Database With Macros
Building macros (short programs that perform a series of steps) helps you speed up and create consistency in your more repetitive Access tasks. From opening a form to running a report to building a new record in a table, macros eliminate redundant procedures by turning them into something you can do with one click.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC device. A Mac OS is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • PC: Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Access 2019, or a subscription to Office 365 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

There are no prerequisites to take this course.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Access 2007

Intermediate Microsoft Access 2007

$190 + applicable tax

Microsoft Access 2007 database developers need the technical knowledge and skills to design databases that use multiple related tables. At the same time, good developers must know how to hide some of these underlying complexities so their completed products are pleasant to use.

In this course, you'll master the tools and techniques required to create user-friendly Access 2007 databases. You'll learn to design one-to-many and many-to-many databases and create queries, forms, and reports to reflect those relationships. You'll find out how to create a switchboard form, change database settings, and use macros to make a database easy and intuitive enough for even a computer novice to use.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started
A database is a collection of data organized into multiple tables. In this lesson, you'll learn the importance of recognizing one-to-many relationships among the data your database will manage. You'll also discover how to create tables that reflect those relationships and create the first table for a sample working database that we'll build together throughout the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Designing a Database
Today, we'll dig deeper into database design and the natural one-to-many and many-to-many relationships among your data. You'll discover the importance of primary, foreign, and composite keys, and how to create them in your own databases. You'll get plenty of hands-on practice as we create more tables for our working sample database.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating Forms
While tables provide a means of storing data, they don't offer much in the way of making a database user-friendly. For that, you need forms. In this lesson, you'll create a form for our working database and learn about the three ways to view forms: Form View, Layout View, and Design View. You'll start learning the tools and techniques the pros use to create attractive forms that are easy to use.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Advanced Form Design
Today's lesson will expand on the skills you learned in Lesson 3. Here you'll learn to move, size, and position multiple controls, choose colors and fonts, and more. You'll also find out how to test your forms and fix common problems. All of these skills will allow you to produce more professional-looking forms that make it easy to work with data in your database.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Creating a One-to-Many Form
Today, we'll return to the topics of one-to-many and many-to-many relationships among tables and explore how they relate to forms. You'll build on the skills you've already acquired to create more complex one-to-many forms that reflect the one-to-many relationships among your data. You'll also discover the value of lookup queries and combo boxes, which make it easy for users for select data for fields without having to type it in from memory.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Mastering Object-Oriented Development
Virtually everything you create in Access is an object, and all objects have properties. Understanding that is key to successful database design and development. In this lesson, you'll discover what that's all about and see how you can use properties to gain more control over every aspect of your database. Along the way, you'll add more enhancements to our working database, making your forms more attractive, usable, and user-friendly.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Sorting, Searching, and E-mail
Sorting and Searching are key ingredients of any database. Today, we'll cover new techniques for sorting form data without the complexities of creating queries. You'll give your form a Search Box that allows users to quickly locate data without the need for complex filters or queries. As an added bonus, you'll learn how to create links in a table for sending e-mail messages with a simple mouse click. And you'll find out some of the secrets of SQL, the Structured Query Language that makes all your queries work the way they do.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Attachments, Expressions, and More
Storing text and numbers in a database is easy. But what if you want to also store pictures, Word documents, or other external files? You can do that too, thanks to the Attachment data type. In this lesson, you'll learn all about attachments, including ways to use them in forms.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Working With Access Reports
Forms are great for interacting with data on a computer screen, but sometimes you have to print data on paper, too. That's where reports come in. In today's lesson, you'll learn the tools and techniques for creating and formatting reports. You'll see how to control margins, spacing, page breaks, page orientation, and other important formatting features. And you'll get plenty of hands-on practice in using the report Layout View and Design View.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Creating a One-to-Many Report
Today, we'll keep working on the skills you learned in Lesson 9, creating a more complex one-to-many report. You'll see how to use a query to combine data from multiple tables, and you'll learn about calculated controls on reports. You'll also discover some important skills for showing subtotals and totals on your one-to-many forms.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Make It User-Friendly
By now, you've created many database objects. Eventually, you may have to hand that database over to less knowledgeable users who won't know what to do with all those tables, queries, forms, and reports. Fortunately, they don't need to. As you'll discover in this lesson, you can hide all the complexities from those users. You'll learn to create a switchboard form that's so easy to use, your database users won't need any database expertise at all!

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Enhance Your Database With Macros
In this, our final lesson, you'll discover still more tools and techniques for making your database more user-friendly. The star of this lesson will be Access macros, which pre-define actions that you can tie to a button click or other event to simplify things for your database users. You'll also learn how to create custom messages that explain things to users so you don't have to. You'll come away with a fully functional database that's easy enough for even a computer novice to operate.

• Internet access
• Email
• One of the following browsers: 
    o Mozilla Firefox 
    o Microsoft Internet Explorer (9.0 or above)
    o Google Chrome
    o Safari
• Adobe PDF  plug-in (a free download obtained at Adobe.com .)

 

Basic computer literacy and skills, as well as some experience with Microsoft Access 2007. Successful completion of Introduction Microsoft Access 2007 is strongly recommended, even if you are familiar with Access 2003 or earlier versions of Access.

Software requirements include Microsoft Office Access 2007 (Amazon ASIN B000HCVR12). Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins. Microsoft Windows 7, XP or Windows Vista. Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Intermediate Microsoft Access 2010

Intermediate Microsoft Access 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Do you have experience building Microsoft Access 2010 databases, but want to take your skills to the next level? In this course, you'll build an entire database project from scratch. By the time you've completed the course, you'll have a fully functional database that tracks customer and order information.  

You'll start by learning how to create your new database by importing information from Excel spreadsheets into tables. Using action queries, you'll add and update key fields that allow you to build relationships among the tables. Then you'll master the steps for building complex yet easy-to-use forms to manage table data.  

The course offers you tips and techniques for optimizing your database, including ways to build crosstab and summary queries so you can access information quickly and easily. You'll also learn about outer table joins that can make you queries more effective. 

Once you've built your database, you'll examine how to build reports using conditional formatting to highlight key data points, and explore Visual Basic, a powerful programming language that allows you to automate simple and complex tasks. Finally, you'll put the finishing touches on your database as you build a navigation form to make it easy for your users to find what they need.

 

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Reviewing Terms and Importing Data
In this first lesson, we’ll review Access key concepts and terminology. You’ll also learn how to import, or share, data between Access and other applications without retyping. The objects you import in this lesson will be the basis of a project that we’ll work on for the rest of the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Key Fields and Action Queries
Today you’ll learn how to set up key fields in tables, plus you’ll use action queries to quickly and easily manipulate multiple-table records with one command.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Relationships of the Database Kind
What are table relationships? And what does referential integrity mean? It’s time to find out how and why to use these features.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating and Modifying Forms
Forms are the user-friendly gateway to Access table data. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create and modify forms and make them easy to use.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Subforms and the Tab Control
In this lesson, you’ll learn how to create a subform without the wizard, and you’ll use the Tab control to arrange form data.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Queries
You’ve already learned to put data into your database in an efficient way. In this lesson, you’ll learn about query joins and data functions. These tools will help you get timely, high-quality data out of your database, so you see all the data you want and none of the data you don’t want.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Query Calculations
Suppose your boss tells you, “I want a list of the customers who placed the most orders and a separate list of the customers who spent the most overall.” How can you find these answers quickly and accurately? Access comes to your rescue again! In this lesson, you’ll explore Access functions, crunch numbers with the best of them, and even design a mathematical formula of your own. And don’t worry if math makes you nervous . . . I’ll walk you through every step!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Summary Queries
In this lesson, you’ll build powerful, fast summary queries that total, count, or average the values in a set of records. You’ll also discover the power of the crosstab query, which can not only summarize data but also rearrange it so that it becomes easier to understand. Finally, you’ll add query parameters that allow you to change a query’s criteria without altering its design.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Building Reports That Pinpoint Key Information
Today you'll use the Report Wizard to build a basic report. Then you'll fine-tune what you've built, and I'll share some tips and tricks I've developed after building thousands of Access reports. Finally, you'll learn about a fantastic tool—conditional formatting, which allows you to visually identify key report data. With a few clicks, your report will change from a mass of numbers to a map of trends and changes that affect your business.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Run Reports from a Custom Dialog Box
Just about every time you run a report, you'll want to limit the data it displays. You might want to see only a certain customer or a particular month and year. In this lesson, you'll build a dialog box that allows the user to run reports based on custom-built criteria.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Using Visual Basic to Automate the Reports Dialog Box

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Putting It All Together
If you're creating a database for others, you must make it easy to use—and as you may remember, Access can look intimidating to a newbie! In this lesson, you'll build a navigation form that directs users to the forms and reports they need. You'll also set up a database for shared use and modify the start-up options.
Microsoft Access 2010 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows XP, Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8. This course is not suitable for Macintosh users. A basic understanding of Microsoft Access objects and their use or completion of Introduction to Microsoft Access 2010 course is required.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Access 2016

Intermediate Microsoft Access 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Do you want to take your Microsoft Access skills to the next level? In this course, you'll master more advanced techniques for this powerful database program and build an entire database project from scratch.

You'll start by importing customer and order information from several Excel spreadsheets as tables in a new database. You'll learn how to add key fields to the tables, update these fields using action queries, and build relationships between the tables.

Once you've mastered proper table construction, you'll build on that knowledge by learning how to create forms to manage table data. You'll discover how to construct crosstab and summary queries, and crunch numbers using query calculations. You'll also learn about outer table joins that can make your queries more effective.

From building reports to using conditional formatting, you'll see how to present your data and gain techniques for using Visual Basic to automate common tasks. Finally, you'll build a navigation form to make it easy for your users to find their way around your database. By the time you've completed the course, you'll have a fully functional database that tracks customer and order information.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Reviewing Terms and Importing Data

In this first lesson, we'll review Access key concepts and terminology. You'll also learn how to import, or share, data between Access and other applications without retyping. The objects you import in this lesson will be the basis of a project that we'll work on for the rest of the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Key Fields and Action Queries
Today you'll learn how to set up key fields in tables, plus you'll use action queries to quickly and easily manipulate multiple-table records with one command.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Relationships of the Database Kind

What are table relationships? And what does referential integrity mean? It's time to find out how and why to use these features.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating and Modifying Forms
Forms are the user-friendly gateway to Access table data. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create and modify forms and make them easy to use.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Subforms and the Tab Control
In this lesson, you'll learn how to add a subform to a main form without the wizard, and you'll use the Tab control to arrange form data.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Queries

You've already learned to put data into your database in an efficient way. In this lesson, you'll learn about query joins and data functions. These tools will help you get timely, high-quality data out of your database, so you see all the data you want and none of the data you don't want.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Query Calculations
Suppose your boss tells you, "I want a list of the customers who placed the most orders and a separate list of the customers who spent the most overall." How can you find these answers quickly and accurately? Access comes to your rescue again! In this lesson, you'll explore Access functions, crunch numbers with the best of them, and even design a mathematical formula of your own. And don't worry if math makes you nervous . . . I'll walk you through every step!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Summary Queries
In this lesson, you'll build powerful, fast summary queries that total, count, or average the values in a set of records. You'll also discover the power of the crosstab query, which can not only summarize data but also rearrange it so that it becomes easier to understand. Finally, you'll add query parameters that allow you to change a query's criteria without altering its design.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Building Reports That Pinpoint Key Information

Today you'll use the Report Wizard to build a basic report. Then you'll fine-tune what you've built, and I'll share some tips and tricks I've developed after building thousands of Access reports. Finally, you'll learn about a fantastic tool—conditional formatting, which allows you to visually identify key report data. With a few clicks, your report will change from a mass of numbers to a map of trends and changes that affect your business.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Run Reports From a Custom Dialog Box
Just about every time you run a report, you'll want to limit the data it displays. You might want to see only a certain customer or a particular month and year. In this lesson, you'll build a dialog box that allows the user to run reports based on custom-built criteria.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Using Visual Basic to Automate the Reports Dialog Box
Visual Basic is a powerful programming language that allows database developers to automate simple and complex tasks. In this lesson, you'll learn a little bit about Visual Basic, using it to make the reports dialog box you built in Lesson 10 fully functional.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Putting It All Together
If you're creating a database for others, you must make it easy to use—and as you may remember, Access can look intimidating to a newbie! In this lesson, you'll build a navigation form that directs users to the forms and reports they need. You'll also set up a database for shared use and modify the start-up options.

Microsoft Access 2016 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7, 8, or 10; this course is not suitable for Macintosh users. A basic understanding of Microsoft Access objects and their use or completion of Introduction to Microsoft Access 2010, Introduction to Microsoft Access 2013, or Introduction to Microsoft Access 2016 course is required.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Access 2019/Office 365

Intermediate Microsoft Access 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Microsoft Access is one of the most widely used information management systems. In this course, you will master advanced techniques for using this powerful database program and build an entire database project from scratch. 

This course will teach you advanced techniques for this powerful database program, including importing Excel spreadsheets as tables, creating query calculations to crunch numbers, and using Visual Basic to automate common tasks. From building reports to using conditional formatting, this course will teach you how to best present your data with Access 2019.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Reviewing Terms and Importing Data
In this first lesson, we'll review Access key concepts and terminology. You'll also learn how to import, or share, data between Access and other applications without retyping. The objects you import in this lesson will be the basis of a project that we'll work on for the rest of the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Key Fields and Action Queries
You'll learn how to set up key fields in tables, plus you'll use action queries to quickly and easily manipulate multiple-table records with one command.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Relationships of the Database Kind
What are table relationships? And what does referential integrity mean? It's time to find out how and why to use these features.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating and Modifying Forms
Forms are the user-friendly gateway to Access table data. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create and modify forms and make them easy to use.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Subforms and the Tab Control
In this lesson, you'll learn how to add a subform to a main form without the wizard, and you'll use the Tab control to arrange form data.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Queries
You've already learned to put data into your database in an efficient way. In this lesson, you'll learn about query joins and data functions. These tools will help you get timely, high-quality data out of your database, so you see all the data you want and none of the data you don't want.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Query Calculations
Suppose your boss tells you, "I want a list of the customers who placed the most orders and a separate list of the customers who spent the most overall." How can you find these answers quickly and accurately? Access comes to your rescue again! In this lesson, you'll explore Access functions, crunch numbers with the best of them, and even design a mathematical formula of your own. And don't worry if math makes you nervous . . . I'll walk you through every step!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Summary Queries
In this lesson, you'll build powerful, fast summary queries that total, count, or average the values in a set of records. You'll also discover the power of the crosstab query, which can not only summarize data but also rearrange it so that it becomes easier to understand. Finally, you'll add query parameters that allow you to change a query's criteria without altering its design.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Building Reports That Pinpoint Key Information
Today you'll use the Report Wizard to build a basic report. Then you'll fine-tune what you've built, and I'll share some tips and tricks I've developed after building thousands of Access reports. Finally, you'll learn about a fantastic tool—conditional formatting, which allows you to visually identify key report data. With a few clicks, your report will change from a mass of numbers to a map of trends and changes that affect your business.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Run Reports from a Custom Dialog Box
Just about every time you run a report, you'll want to limit the data it displays. You might want to see only a certain customer or a particular month and year. In this lesson, you'll build a dialog box that allows the user to run reports based on custom-built criteria.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Using Visual Basic to Automate the Reports Dialog Box
Visual Basic is a powerful programming language that allows database developers to automate simple and complex tasks. In this lesson, you'll learn a little bit about Visual Basic, using it to make the reports dialog box you built in Lesson 10 fully functional.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Putting It All Together
If you're creating a database for others, you must make it easy to use—and as you may remember, Access can look intimidating to a newbie! In this lesson, you'll build a navigation form that directs users to the forms and reports they need. You'll also set up a database for shared use and modify the start-up options.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. A Mac OS is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Access, or a subscription to Office 365 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

A basic understanding of Microsoft Access objects and their use or completion of Introduction to Microsoft Access is required.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2010

Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Do you work with numbers? Then you need to master Microsoft Excel 2010—and this is the place to do it. Even "non-techie" beginners will find it easy to learn Excel in this fun, step-by-step online course.  

These lessons will teach you dozens of shortcuts and tricks for setting up fully formatted worksheets quickly and efficiently. You'll also learn the secrets behind writing powerful mathematical formulas and discover how to use the function wizard to quickly and automatically calculate statistics, loan payments, future value, and more.  

In addition, you'll get tips on sorting and analyzing data, designing custom charts and graphs, creating three-dimensional workbooks, building links between files, endowing your worksheets with decision-making capabilities, and automating frequently-repeated tasks with macros and buttons.  

This is not a tutorial, but an in-depth class where you'll get training, help, and personal support from an experienced instructor as you're learning Excel basics step-by-step. By the time you're done, you'll be using this vital Office 2010 tool like a pro.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel Basics
In our first lesson, you'll develop a solid understanding of the Excel interface. You'll become fluent in the secret language spoken only by Excel users, you'll discover the best way to correct just about any mistake you might make in Excel, and you'll find yourself gliding effortlessly from cell to cell, leaving behind expertly written labels, numbers, and formulas.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Worksheet
In this lesson, you'll learn five simple steps you should always follow to ensure that your worksheets are always well-planned, well-constructed, and beautifully formatted.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Time-Savers
Our third lesson will teach you the tricks of the Excel masters: a wide variety of useful shortcuts guaranteed to save you time, energy, and frustration. We'll also cover the art of file management in this lesson, so you'll have no trouble saving, retrieving, printing, and emailing your worksheets, or copying, renaming, and even deleting files. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll really start to feel like an Excel pro.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Relative & Absolute References
Do you know the difference between a relative reference, an absolute reference, and a circular reference? You will after this lesson. Today, we focus on writing sophisticated formulas that can help ease us through some rather sticky scenarios.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

3-Dimensional Workbooks
With enough practice, most Excel users quickly become adept at organizing their worksheets across two dimensions: rows and columns. But only a select few will learn how to take their worksheets into the third dimension. Today, you will join that exclusive group. Prepare to have your socks knocked off as you gain hands-on experience in the construction of three-dimensional workbooks.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sorting and Subtotaling
No Excel course would be complete without a discussion of Excel's amazing data-crunching capabilities. Today, you'll not only learn how to build a database in Excel, you'll also learn how to subtotal, sort, and filter.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Charting
In this lesson and the next, we'll explore the exciting world of charts. You'll build your first graph today, and you'll learn how easy it is to adjust the chart type, labels, titles, colors, and many other aspects of your chart.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Advanced Graphing Techniques
Today, we'll dig deep into Excel's charting capabilities. You'll explore everything from bar charts and line charts to more prosaic graphs like the pie chart, the bubble chart, and 3-D charts. You'll find out how to personalize your charts with photographs, text labels, and drawings, and you'll discover the best ways to print or otherwise display the truly impressive charts that you'll be creating.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

The Function Wizard
Excel includes many powerful functions that can automatically perform some very complicated tasks for you. In today's lesson, you'll learn some very interesting ways to put these functions to work for you. You'll find out how to ask Excel to magically derive averages, modes, maximums, minimums, and other useful statistics from nothing more than a column or two of numbers.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Financial Functions
We'll continue our exploration of Excel functions with an in-depth look at Excel's handy financial functions today. By the time this lesson is over, you'll be able to figure out how much money you'll have when you retire, when your kids reach college, or just before your next vacation. You'll be able to calculate the monthly payment on just about any type of loan, and you'll know how to figure out how long it will take to pay off your credit cards. You'll even create an amortization table of your very own, just like the one lenders use to track a loan's payoff amount over time.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Worksheet Automation
Students often rank this lesson as one of their favorites. Today, you'll find out how to automate just about any task you find tedious or time-consuming. You'll discover how to move your most frequently used commands from their present, obscure locations to a much more convenient place: the toolbar that's always perched at the very top of your screen. You'll also learn how macros can be used to reduce just about any complex task to a single keystroke.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Decision-Making
I think you'll be intrigued by our final lesson, in which you'll teach Excel not only how to make decisions, but also how to act upon those decisions. We'll use a special function in Excel that allows it to make comparisons and use that comparison as the basis for important decisions.
Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 10, Vista, or XP; Microsoft Excel 2010 or Microsoft Office 2010 (the Home and Student Edition, Home and Business Edition, or Professional Edition) of Microsoft Office 2010 are all acceptable.

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users, users of older versions of Microsoft Excel, or users of OpenOffice.

Note:  "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel 2010 will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course. 

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2013

Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Do you work with numbers? Then you need to master Microsoft Excel 2013—and this is the place to do it. Even "non-techie" beginners will find it easy to learn Excel in this fun, step-by-step online course.

These lessons will teach you dozens of shortcuts and tricks for setting up fully formatted worksheets quickly and efficiently. You'll also learn the secrets behind writing powerful mathematical formulas and discover how to use the function wizard to quickly and automatically calculate statistics, loan payments, future value, and more.

In addition, you'll get tips on sorting and analyzing data, designing custom charts and graphs, creating three-dimensional workbooks, building links between files, endowing your worksheets with decision-making capabilities, and automating frequently-repeated tasks with macros and buttons. This informative course covers the new Quick Analysis, Flash Fill, and charting capabilities available in Excel 2013.

This is not a tutorial, but an in-depth class where you'll get training, help, and personal support from an experienced instructor as you're learning Excel basics step-by-step. By the time you're done, you'll be using this vital Office 2013 application like a pro.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel Basics
In our first lesson, you'll develop a solid understanding of the Excel interface. You'll become fluent in the secret language spoken only by Excel users, you'll discover the best way to correct just about any mistake you might make in Excel, and you'll find yourself gliding effortlessly from cell to cell, leaving behind expertly written labels, numbers, and formulas.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Worksheet
In this lesson, you'll learn five simple steps you should always follow to ensure that your worksheets are always well-planned, well-constructed, and beautifully formatted.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Time-Savers
Our third lesson will teach you the tricks of the Excel masters: a wide variety of useful shortcuts guaranteed to save you time, energy, and frustration. We'll also spend some time working with the Quick Analysis and Flash Fill tools, introduced in Excel 2013. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll really start to feel like an Excel pro.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Relative, Absolute, Mixed, & Circular References
Do you know the difference between a relative reference, an absolute reference, a mixed reference, and a circular reference? You will after this lesson. Today, we focus on writing sophisticated formulas that can help ease us through some rather sticky scenarios.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

3-Dimensional Workbooks
With enough practice, most Excel users quickly become adept at organizing their worksheets across two dimensions: rows and columns. But only a select few will learn how to take their worksheets into the third dimension. Today, you'll join that exclusive group. Prepare to have your socks knocked off as you gain hands-on experience in the construction of three-dimensional workbooks.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sorting, Subtotaling, and Filtering
No Excel course would be complete without a discussion of Excel's amazing data-crunching capabilities. Today, you'll not only learn how to build a table in Excel, you'll also learn how to subtotal, sort, and filter.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Charting Basics
In this lesson, we'll explore the exciting world of charts. You'll build your first graph today, and you'll learn how easy it is to adjust the chart type, labels, titles, colors, and many other aspects of your chart.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Advanced Charting Techniques
Today, you'll dig deep into Excel's charting capabilities. You'll explore everything from bar charts and line charts to more prosaic graphs like the pie chart and 3-D charts. You'll find out how to personalize your charts with photographs, text labels, and drawings. You'll also discover the best ways to format your chart for print or otherwise display the truly impressive charts that you'll be creating.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Intro to Excel's Statistical Functions
Excel includes many powerful functions that can automatically perform some very complicated tasks for you. In today's lesson, you'll learn some very interesting ways to put these functions to work for you. You'll find out how to ask Excel to magically derive averages, modes, maximums, minimums, and other useful statistics from nothing more than a column or two of numbers.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Financial Functions
We'll continue our exploration of Excel functions with an in-depth look at Excel's handy financial functions today. By the time this lesson is over, you'll be able to figure out how much money you'll have when you retire, when your kids reach college, or just before your next vacation. You'll be able to calculate the monthly payment on just about any type of loan, and you'll know how to figure out how long it will take to pay off your credit cards. You'll even create an amortization table of your very own, just like the one lenders use to track a loan's payoff amount over time.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Worksheet Automation
Students often rank this lesson as one of their favorites. Today, you'll find out how to automate just about any task you find tedious or time-consuming. You'll discover how to move your most frequently used commands from their present, obscure locations to a much more convenient place: the toolbar that's always perched at the very top of your screen. You'll also learn how you can use macros to reduce just about any complex task to a single keystroke.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Mastering Excel's IF Function
I think you'll be intrigued by our final lesson, in which you'll learn how to use Excel to aid you in decision making. We'll use a special function in Excel that allows it to make comparisons and use those comparisons as the basis for important decisions.

Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8; Microsoft Windows 10, Microsoft Excel 2013 or Microsoft Office 2013 are acceptable. Please be sure to install the software on your computer before the course begins.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users who are using the Office Mac Home versions or for users of older versions of Microsoft Excel. "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel 2013 will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2016

Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Do you work with numbers? Then you need to master Microsoft Excel 2016 (now available through Office 365)—and this is the place to do it. Even "non-techie" beginners will find it easy to learn Excel in this fun, step-by-step online course.  

These lessons will teach you dozens of shortcuts and tricks for setting up fully formatted worksheets quickly and efficiently. You'll also learn the secrets behind writing powerful mathematical formulas and discover how to use the function wizard to quickly and automatically calculate statistics, loan payments, future value, and more.  

In addition, you'll get tips on sorting and analyzing data, designing custom charts and graphs, creating three-dimensional workbooks, building links between files, endowing your worksheets with decision-making capabilities, and automating frequently-repeated tasks with macros and buttons. This informative course covers Quick Analysis, Flash Fill, and powerful charting capabilities available in Excel 2016.

This is not a tutorial, but an in-depth class where you'll get training, help, and personal support from an experienced instructor as you're learning Excel basics step-by-step. By the time you're done, you'll be using this vital Office 2016 tool like a pro.

Benefits of Instructor-Led Courses:

  • Two lessons are released each week, so you never feel overwhelmed with your workload
  • Access an expert instructor to reinforce your learning and get feedback
  • Learn from your peers and engage in weekly discussion forums

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel Basics
In our first lesson, you'll develop a solid understanding of the Excel interface. You'll become fluent in the secret language spoken only by Excel users, you'll discover the best way to correct just about any mistake you might make in Excel, and you'll find yourself gliding effortlessly from cell to cell, leaving behind expertly written labels, numbers, and formulas.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Worksheet
In this lesson, you'll learn five simple steps you should always follow to ensure that your worksheets are always well-planned, well-constructed, and beautifully formatted.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Time-Savers
Our third lesson will teach you the tricks of the Excel masters: a wide variety of useful shortcuts guaranteed to save you time, energy, and frustration. We'll also spend some time working with the Quick Analysis and Flash Fill tools. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll really start to feel like an Excel pro.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Relative, Absolute, Mixed, and Circular References
Do you know the difference between a relative reference, an absolute reference, a mixed reference, and a circular reference? You will after this lesson. Today, we focus on writing sophisticated formulas that can help ease us through some rather sticky scenarios.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

3-Dimensional Workbooks
With enough practice, most Excel users quickly become adept at organizing their worksheets across two dimensions: rows and columns. But only a select few will learn how to take their worksheets into the third dimension. Today, you'll join that exclusive group. Prepare to have your socks knocked off as you gain hands-on experience in the construction of three-dimensional workbooks.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sorting, Subtotaling, and Filtering
No Excel course would be complete without a discussion of Excel's amazing data-crunching capabilities. Today, you'll not only learn how to build a table in Excel, you'll also learn how to subtotal, sort, and filter.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Charting Basics
In this lesson, we'll explore the exciting world of charts. You'll build your first graph today, and you'll learn how easy it is to adjust the chart type, labels, titles, colors, and many other aspects of your chart.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Advanced Charting Techniques
Today, you'll dig deep into Excel's charting capabilities. You'll explore everything from bar charts and line charts to more prosaic graphs like the pie chart and 3-D charts. You'll find out how to personalize your charts with photographs, text labels, and drawings. You'll also discover the best ways to format your chart for print or otherwise display the truly impressive charts that you'll be creating.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Intro to Excel's Statistical Functions
Excel includes many powerful functions that can automatically perform some very complicated tasks for you. In today's lesson, you'll learn some very interesting ways to put these functions to work for you. You'll find out how to ask Excel to magically derive averages, modes, maximums, minimums, and other useful statistics from nothing more than a column or two of numbers.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Financial Functions
We'll continue our exploration of Excel functions with an in-depth look at Excel's handy financial functions today. By the time this lesson is over, you'll be able to figure out how much money you'll have when you retire, when your kids reach college, or just before your next vacation. You'll be able to calculate the monthly payment on just about any type of loan, and you'll know how to figure out how long it will take to pay off your credit cards. You'll even create an amortization table of your very own, just like the one lenders use to track a loan's payoff amount over time.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Worksheet Automation
Students often rank this lesson as one of their favorites. Today, you'll find out how to automate just about any task you find tedious or time-consuming. You'll discover how to move your most frequently used commands from their present, obscure locations to a much more convenient place: the toolbar that's always perched at the very top of your screen. You'll also learn how you can use macros to reduce just about any complex task to a single keystroke.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Mastering Excel's IF Function
I think you'll be intrigued by our final lesson, in which you'll learn how to use Excel to aid you in decision making. We'll use a special function in Excel that allows it to make comparisons and use those comparisons as the basis for important decisions.

Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or Microsoft Windows 10; Microsoft Office Home and Student 2016 or Microsoft Office 365 are acceptable. A free 30-day trial of Office 365 Home Premium may be available at (https://office.microsoft.com/en-us/try/). Then, a subscription can be purchased for as little as $9.99 per month. Please be sure to install the software on your computer before the course begins.

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users, users of older versions of Microsoft Excel, or users of OpenOffice.

Note:  "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.

 

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365

Introduction to Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Do you manage large sets of numbers, names, dates, or other pieces of information? If so, then you need to create worksheets to manage, store, organize, and even analyze this information. Excel, Microsoft’s powerful spreadsheet software, is the most widely-used program to handle this task. In fact, most workplaces require that new employees have a basic level of understanding of Microsoft Excel. 

If you want to learn the 2019 version of Microsoft Excel, this course will introduce you to the program’s basic functions and uses. Through hands-on lessons, you will learn numerous shortcuts to quickly and efficiently set up worksheets. You will also learn how to use the function wizard to calculate statistics, future values, and more. In addition, you will get tips on sorting and analyzing data, creating three-dimensional workbooks, and automating frequently-repeated tasks with macros and buttons. By the time you're done, you will know how to use this vital Office 2019 tool.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel Basics
In our first lesson, you'll develop a solid understanding of the Excel interface. You'll become fluent in the secret language spoken only by Excel users, you'll discover the best way to correct just about any mistake you might make in Excel, and you'll find yourself gliding effortlessly from cell to cell, leaving behind expertly written labels, numbers, and formulas.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Worksheet
In this lesson, you'll learn five simple steps you should always follow to ensure that your worksheets are always well-planned, well-constructed, and beautifully formatted.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Time-Savers
Our third lesson will teach you the tricks of the Excel masters: a wide variety of useful shortcuts guaranteed to save you time, energy, and frustration. We'll also spend some time working with the Quick Analysis and Flash Fill tools. By the time you finish this lesson, you'll really start to feel like an Excel pro.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Relative, Absolute, Mixed, and Circular References
Do you know the difference between a relative reference, an absolute reference, a mixed reference, and a circular reference? You will after this lesson. Today, we focus on writing sophisticated formulas that can help ease us through some rather sticky scenarios.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

3-Dimensional Workbooks
With enough practice, most Excel users quickly become adept at organizing their worksheets across two dimensions: rows and columns. But only a select few will learn how to take their worksheets into the third dimension. Today, you'll join that exclusive group. Prepare to have your socks knocked off as you gain hands-on experience in the construction of three-dimensional workbooks.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sorting, Subtotaling, and Filtering
No Excel course would be complete without a discussion of Excel's amazing data-crunching capabilities. Today, you'll not only learn how to build a table in Excel, you'll also learn how to subtotal, sort, and filter.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Charting Basics
In this lesson, we'll explore the exciting world of charts. You'll build your first graph today, and you'll learn how easy it is to adjust the chart type, labels, titles, colors, and many other aspects of your chart.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Advanced Charting Techniques
Today, you'll dig deep into Excel's charting capabilities. You'll explore everything from bar charts and line charts to more prosaic graphs like the pie chart and 3-D charts. You'll find out how to personalize your charts with photographs, text labels, and drawings. You'll also discover the best ways to format your chart for print or otherwise display the truly impressive charts that you'll be creating.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Intro to Excel's Statistical Functions
Excel includes many powerful functions that can automatically perform some very complicated tasks for you. In today's lesson, you'll learn some very interesting ways to put these functions to work for you. You'll find out how to ask Excel to magically derive averages, modes, maximums, minimums, and other useful statistics from nothing more than a column or two of numbers.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Financial Functions
We'll continue our exploration of Excel functions with an in-depth look at Excel's handy financial functions today. By the time this lesson is over, you'll be able to figure out how much money you'll have when you retire, when your kids reach college, or just before your next vacation. You'll be able to calculate the monthly payment on just about any type of loan, and you'll know how to figure out how long it will take to pay off your credit cards. You'll even create an amortization table of your very own, just like the one lenders use to track a loan's payoff amount over time.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Worksheet Automation
Students often rank this lesson as one of their favorites. Today, you'll find out how to automate just about any task you find tedious or time-consuming. You'll discover how to move your most frequently used commands from their present, obscure locations to a much more convenient place: the toolbar that's always perched at the very top of your screen. You'll also learn how you can use macros to reduce just about any complex task to a single keystroke.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Mastering Excel's IF Function
I think you'll be intrigued by our final lesson, in which you'll learn how to use Excel to aid you in decision making. We'll use a special function in Excel that allows it to make comparisons and use those comparisons as the basis for important decisions.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. A Mac is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • PC: Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Excel, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

There are no prerequisites to take this course.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2010

Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Take your Excel skills to the next level! Master charting, PivotTables, Slicers, Sparklines, and other advanced features of Microsoft Excel 2010, and discover how this powerful MS Office program can boost your productivity.

In these hands-on lessons, you'll learn how to create informative, eye-catching charts and harness the power of Excel's data analysis and filtering tools. In addition, you'll find out how easy it is to create macros that let you manipulate data with the push of a button. You'll also discover how to use Goal Seek and Solver and apply them to real-world problems. And you'll set yourself apart from the casual Excel user by adding VLOOKUP, INDEX & MATCH, and Excel's other time-saving functions to your repertoire.

So get ready for six fun, action-packed weeks that will make you an Excel expert!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel 2010 Charts and Graphs
In our first lesson, you'll discover why Excel 2010 is such a powerful and user-friendly charting tool. To you, a workbook's numbers might tell an interesting story. But to others, that story might not be quite so obvious—they might just see plain old numbers. So today, you'll find out how to choose the right chart for telling your story, and then how to create, format, and edit your chart to help others clearly visualize that story.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

More Excel Charts and Graphs
There are so many great charting features and enhancements in Excel 2010, there's no way we could cover all of them in a single lesson. So today, we'll continue exploring Excel's charting options—this time looking at the lesser-known options that are available to you. Even though they aren't well known, these options can add tremendous value to your worksheets in the right situations. We'll walk through a few of them step-by-step, so you'll see the value for yourself.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

AutoFilter and Sorting
Working with data in Excel can be quite easy—and sometimes even fun—when you know about the extra tools that are available once you have your data arranged in a table format. One of these great tools is the Auto Filter command. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to use Auto Filter to limit your table information to just the records you want. Not only does Auto Filter allow for finding exact matches, but it can also filter and sort based on cell shading or font color. How great is that?

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Goal Seeking
Normally, you'll use your Excel workbooks as a place to enter formulas and get answers. But what if the formula isn't returning the answer you want? If you know what you want, but you just don't know what formula will get you there, then Excel's Goal Seek is exactly what you need. This tool will help you avoid the trial-and-error approach that most Excel users go through to get to the right answer. In this lesson, we'll walk through multiple examples together, exploring several ways to apply this great feature.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

PivotTables
Today, you'll learn how to use one of the best features of Excel: the PivotTable. If you've heard about PivotTables before, then you know what I mean. There's no greater what-if analysis tool to summarize, reorganize, and report data. When we practice creating a PivotTable, you'll discover how "pivoting" your data helps you gain valuable insights by seeing the same information from a different perspective. This is a lesson you won't want to miss!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Advanced PivotTables
Just like charting, Excel's PivotTables are too big a topic to fit into one lesson. So today, we'll take PivotTables to the next level by taking a tour through some of Excel's more advanced techniques. You'll learn how quick and easy it is to group your data to give your PivotTable even more power. Then you'll find out how a PivotTable can serve as your source and inspiration for some really nice charts, specifically, the PivotChart. Last, you'll become an expert in using a new Excel 2010 PivotTable filtering tool called Slicer.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

The Solver
Have you ever worked with a financial model in Excel and wondered how you could speculate different outcomes by changing different input amounts? The Excel Solver can do just that. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Solver to solve a complex problem based on the criteria and constraints we provide it. If you liked the Goal Seek lesson, then this Solver lesson is going to knock your socks off.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Sparklines
There's nothing more exciting than learning how to master a new feature in Excel.  In Excel 2010, Microsoft added a thrilling new feature called Sparklines.  In today's lesson, we'll explore in detail how to create all three types of Sparklines, as well as formatting options for each.  By the end of the lesson, you'll have the skills to create dashboard-like mini charts sure to make you the envy of your office.  If you enjoy creating charts, you'll really enjoy this lesson.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Macros
Today's topic is a student (and instructor) favorite. In this lesson, you'll find out how to use macros to turn boring, repetitive, time-consuming tasks into automated Excel functions. Tired of doing the same formatting on the same report month after month? Here's your chance to see how to record a macro that performs that time-consuming task in seconds with just one swift click of a button! How will you spend all the extra time that this lesson will save you?

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Introduction to Functions
If you've used Excel for a while, you know there are hundreds of functions at your disposal. We're going to spend the last three lessons of this course going over exactly how and why you'd use them. We'll start today by going through a quick overview of all the categories of functions and the different methods you can use to create them. Then, later in the lesson, we'll ease into creating various functions using some from the Text category.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Math/Trig Functions
Next to learning how to create macros, most students want to learn as much as they can about Excel functions. In today's lesson, we'll dig a little deeper into using some of the slightly more complex functions that you'll find in the Math & Trig category. Specifically, we'll look at two of my favorites, the SUMIF and COUNTIF functions, and discuss how to use one of Excel 2010's new functions, SUMIFS. If one of your objectives in taking this course is to learn more about functions, you're in for a treat!

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

VLOOKUP and INDEX Functions
Since functions are such an important and integral part of using Excel, we'll spend our final lesson going over a few more of them. Today, you're going to learn how to use the extremely popular VLOOKUP function. If you're already accustomed to using VLOOKUP, don't feel short changed, because we're going to add to the complexity. We're going to use the INDEX and MATCH functions to do something just short of amazing. This is another lesson you won't want to miss!
Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 10, Vista, or XP, and Microsoft Excel 2010 or Microsoft Excel Home and Student 2010 or Microsoft Office 2010 (the Home and Student Edition or Standard Edition of Microsoft Office 2010 is acceptable). Please be sure to install the software on your computer before the course begins. This course is not suitable for Macintosh users or for users of older versions of Microsoft Excel.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2013

Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Take your Excel skills to the next level! Master charting, PivotTables, Slicers, Sparklines, and other advanced features of Microsoft Excel 2013, and discover how this powerful MS Office program can boost your productivity.

In these hands-on lessons, you'll learn how to create informative, eye-catching charts and graphs and harness the power of Excel's data analysis tools and AutoFilter commands. In addition, you'll find out how easy it is to create macros that let you manipulate data with the push of a button. You'll also discover how to use Goal Seek and Solver and apply them to real-world problems. And you'll set yourself apart from the casual Excel user by adding VLOOKUP, INDEX & MATCH, and Excel's other time-saving functions to your repertoire.

So get ready for six fun, action-packed weeks that will make you an Excel expert!



Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel 2013 Charts and Graphs
In our first lesson, you'll discover why Excel 2013 is such a powerful and user-friendly charting tool. To you, a workbook's numbers might tell an interesting story. But to others, that story might not be quite so obvious—they might just see plain old numbers. So, today, you'll find out how to choose the right chart for telling your story and then how to create, format, and edit your chart to help others clearly visualize that story.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

More Excel Charts
There are so many great charting features and enhancements in Excel 2013, there's no way we could cover all of them in a single lesson. So, today, we'll continue exploring Excel's charting options—this time looking at the lesser-known options that are available to you. Even though they aren't well-known, these options can add tremendous value to your worksheets in the right situations. We'll walk through a few of them step-by-step, so you'll see the value for yourself.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

AutoFilter and Sorting
Working with data in Excel can be quite easy—and sometimes even fun—when you know about the extra tools that are available once you have your data arranged in a table format. One of these great tools is the Auto Filter command. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to use Auto Filter to limit your table information to just the records you want. Not only does Auto Filter allow for finding exact matches, but it can also filter and sort based on cell shading or font color. How great is that?

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Goal Seeking
Normally, you'll use your Excel workbooks as a place to enter formulas and get answers. But what if the formula isn't returning the answer you want? If you know what you want, but you just don't know what formula will get you there, then Excel's Goal Seek is exactly what you need. This tool will help you avoid the trial-and-error approach that most Excel users go through to get to the right answer. In this lesson, we'll walk through multiple examples together, exploring several ways to apply this great feature.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

PivotTables
Today, you'll learn how to use one of the best features of Excel: the PivotTable. If you've heard about PivotTables before, then you know what I mean. There's no greater what-if analysis tool to summarize, reorganize, and report data. When we practice creating a PivotTable, you'll discover how "pivoting" your data helps you gain valuable insights by seeing the same information from a different perspective. This is a lesson you won't want to miss!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Advanced PivotTables
Just like charting, Excel's PivotTables are too big a topic to fit into one lesson. So, today, we'll take PivotTables to the next level by taking a tour through some of Excel's more advanced techniques. You'll learn how quick and easy it is to group your data to give your PivotTable even more power. Then you'll find out how a PivotTable can serve as your source and inspiration for some really nice charts, specifically, the PivotChart. Last, you'll become an expert in using the Excel 2013 PivotTable filtering tool called Slicer.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Solver
Have you ever worked with a financial model in Excel and wondered how you could speculate different outcomes by changing different input amounts? The Excel Solver can do just that. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Solver to solve a complex problem based on the criteria and constraints we provide it. If you liked the Goal Seek lesson, then this Solver lesson is going to knock your socks off.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Sparklines
There's nothing more exciting than learning how to master a new feature in Excel. In today's lesson, we'll explore in detail how to create all three types of Sparklines, as well as formatting options for each. By the end of the lesson, you'll have the skills to create dashboardlike mini charts sure to make you the envy of your office. If you enjoy creating charts, you'll really enjoy this lesson.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Macros
Today's topic is a student (and instructor) favorite. In this lesson, you'll find out how to use macros to turn boring, repetitive, time-consuming tasks into automated Excel functions. Tired of doing the same formatting on the same report month after month? Here's your chance to see how to record a macro that performs that time-consuming task in seconds with just one swift click of a button! How will you spend all the extra time that this lesson will save you?

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Introduction to Functions
If you've used Excel for a while, you know there are hundreds of functions at your disposal. We're going to spend the last three lessons of this course going over exactly how and why you'd use them. We'll start today by going through a quick overview of all the categories of functions and the different methods you can use to create them. Then, later in the lesson, we'll ease into creating various functions using some from the Text category.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Math/Trig Functions
Next to learning how to create macros, most students want to learn as much as they can about Excel functions. In today's lesson, we'll dig a little deeper into using some of the slightly more complex functions that you'll find in the Math & Trig category. Specifically, we'll look at two of my favorites, the SUMIF and COUNTIF functions, and discuss how to use one of the more complex functions, SUMIFS. If one of your objectives in taking this course is to learn more about functions, you're in for a treat!

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

VLOOKUP, INDEX, and MATCH Functions
Since functions are such an important and integral part of using Excel, we'll spend our final lesson going over a few more of them. Today, you're going to learn how to use the extremely popular VLOOKUP function. If you're already accustomed to using VLOOKUP, don't feel short-changed, because we're going to add to the complexity. We're going to use the INDEX and MATCH functions to do something just short of amazing. This is another lesson you won't want to miss!

Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8; Microsoft Windows 10, Microsoft Excel 2013 or Microsoft Office 2013 (Office Home and Student 2013, Office Professional Plus 2013, Office Standard 2013, Office Home and Business 2013, Office 365, Office 365 ProPlus, Office 365 Home Premium, Office 365 University) of Microsoft Office 2013 are all acceptable.  A free 30-day trial of Office 365 Home Premium may be available at Office Online. Then, a subscription can be purchased for as little as $9.99 per month.

Please be sure to install the software on your computer before the course begins. 

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users who are using the Office Mac Home versions or for users of older versions of Microsoft Excel. "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel 2013 will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.

 



Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2016

Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Take your Excel skills to the next level! Master charting, PivotTables, Slicers, Sparklines, and other advanced features of Microsoft Excel 2016, and discover how this powerful MS Office program can boost your productivity.

In these hands-on lessons, you'll learn how to create informative, eye-catching charts and graphs, and harness the power of Excel's data analysis tools and AutoFilter commands. In addition, you'll find out how easy it is to create macros that let you manipulate data with the push of a button. You'll also discover how to use Goal Seek and Solver and apply them to real-world problems. And you'll set yourself apart from the casual Excel user by adding VLOOKUP, INDEX & MATCH, and Excel's other time-saving functions to your repertoire.

So get ready for six fun, action-packed weeks that will make you an Excel expert!

Benefits of Instructor-Led Courses:

  • Two lessons are released each week, so you never feel overwhelmed with your workload
  • Access an expert instructor to reinforce your learning and get feedback
  • Learn from your peers and engage in weekly discussion forums

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel Charts and Graphs
In our first lesson, you'll discover why Excel is such a powerful and user-friendly charting tool. To you, a workbook's numbers might tell an interesting story. But to others, that story might not be quite so obvious—they might just see plain old numbers. So, today, you'll find out how to choose the right chart for telling your story and then how to create, format, and edit your chart to help others clearly visualize that story.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

More Excel Charts
There are so many great charting features and enhancements in Excel 2016, there's no way we could cover all of them in a single lesson. So, today, we'll continue exploring Excel's charting options—this time looking at the lesser-known options that are available to you. Even though they aren't well-known, these options can add tremendous value to your worksheets in the right situations. We'll walk through a few of them step-by-step, so you'll see the value for yourself.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

AutoFilter and Sorting
Working with data in Excel can be quite easy—and sometimes even fun—when you know about the extra tools that are available once you have your data arranged in a table format. One of these great tools is the Auto Filter command. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to use Auto Filter to limit your table information to just the records you want. Not only does Auto Filter allow for finding exact matches, but it can also filter and sort based on cell shading or font color. How great is that?

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Goal Seeking
Normally, you'll use your Excel workbooks as a place to enter formulas and get answers. But what if the formula isn't returning the answer you want? If you know what you want, but you just don't know what formula will get you there, then Excel's Goal Seek is exactly what you need. This tool will help you avoid the trial-and-error approach that most Excel users go through to get to the right answer. In this lesson, we'll walk through multiple examples together, exploring several ways to apply this great feature.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

PivotTables
Today, you'll learn how to use one of the best features of Excel: the PivotTable. If you've heard about PivotTables before, then you know what I mean. There's no greater what-if analysis tool to summarize, reorganize, and report data. When we practice creating a PivotTable, you'll discover how "pivoting" your data helps you gain valuable insights by seeing the same information from a different perspective. This is a lesson you won't want to miss!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Advanced PivotTables
Just like charting, Excel's PivotTables are too big a topic to fit into one lesson. So, today, we'll take PivotTables to the next level by taking a tour through some of Excel's more advanced techniques. You'll learn how quick and easy it is to group your data to give your PivotTable even more power. Then you'll find out how a PivotTable can serve as your source and inspiration for some really nice charts, specifically, the PivotChart. Last, you'll become an expert in using the Excel PivotTable filtering tool called Slicer.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Solver
Have you ever worked with a financial model in Excel and wondered how you could speculate different outcomes by changing different input amounts? The Excel Solver can do just that. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Solver to solve a complex problem based on the criteria and constraints we provide it. If you liked the Goal Seek lesson, then this Solver lesson is going to knock your socks off.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Sparklines
There's nothing more exciting than learning how to master a useful and eye-catching feature in Excel. In today's lesson, we'll explore in detail how to create all three types of Sparklines, as well as formatting options for each. By the end of the lesson, you'll have the skills to create dashboard-like mini charts sure to make you the envy of your office. If you enjoy creating charts, you'll really enjoy this lesson.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Macros
Today's topic is a student (and instructor) favorite. In this lesson, you'll find out how to use macros to turn boring, repetitive, time-consuming tasks into automated Excel functions. Tired of doing the same formatting on the same report month after month? Here's your chance to see how to record a macro that performs that time-consuming task in seconds with just one swift click of a button! How will you spend all the extra time that this lesson will save you?

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Introduction to Functions
If you've used Excel for a while, you know there are hundreds of functions at your disposal. We're going to spend the last three lessons of this course going over exactly how and why you'd use them. We'll start today by going through a quick overview of all the categories of functions and the different methods you can use to create them. Then, later in the lesson, we'll ease into creating various functions using some from the Text category.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Math/Trig Functions
Next to learning how to create macros, most students want to learn as much as they can about Excel functions. In today's lesson, we'll dig a little deeper into using some of the slightly more complex functions that you'll find in the Math & Trig category. Specifically, we'll look at two of my favorites, the SUMIF and COUNTIF functions, and discuss how to use one of the more complex functions, SUMIFS. If one of your objectives in taking this course is to learn more about functions, you're in for a treat!

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

VLOOKUP, INDEX, and MATCH Functions
Since functions are such an important and integral part of using Excel, we'll spend our final lesson going over a few more of them. Today, you're going to learn how to use the extremely popular VLOOKUP function. If you're already accustomed to using VLOOKUP, don't feel short-changed, because we're going to add to the complexity. We're going to use the INDEX and MATCH functions to do something just short of amazing. This is another lesson you won't want to miss!

Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or Microsoft Windows 10; Microsoft Office Home and Student 2016 or Microsoft Office 365 are acceptable. A free 30-day trial of Office 365 Home Premium may be available at (https://office.microsoft.com/en-us/try/). Then, a subscription can be purchased for as little as $9.99 per month. Please be sure to install the software on your computer before the course begins.

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users, users of older versions of Microsoft Excel, or users of OpenOffice.

Note:  "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.

 

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365

Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Many businesses rely on spreadsheets to manage budgets, schedules, and tracking. Microsoft Excel is considered the industry standard for spreadsheets. If you use Excel regularly and want to learn more advanced functions in this powerful software, this course is for you. 

You will learn to how harness the power of Excel's data analysis tools and AutoFilter commands and how to create macros that eliminate repetitive tasks. Set yourself apart from the casual Excel user by adding VLOOKUP, INDEX & MATCH, and other intermediate functions to your professional skill set. In addition, you will learn to create macros that let you manipulate data with the push of a button. You'll also discover how to use Goal Seek and Solver and apply them to real-world problems.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Excel Charts and Graphs
In this first lesson, you'll discover why Excel is such a powerful and user-friendly charting tool. To you, a workbook's numbers might tell an interesting story. But to others, that story might not be quite so obvious—they might just see plain old numbers. So, today, you'll find out how to choose the right chart for telling your story and then how to create, format, and edit your chart to help others clearly visualize that story.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

More Excel Charts
There are so many great charting features and enhancements in Excel 2019, there's no way we could cover all of them in a single lesson. So, today, we'll continue exploring Excel's charting options—this time looking at the lesser-known options that are available to you. Even though they aren't well-known, these options can add tremendous value to your worksheets in the right situations. We'll walk through a few of them step-by-step, so you'll see the value for yourself.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

AutoFilter and Sorting
Working with data in Excel can be quite easy—and sometimes even fun—when you know about the extra tools that are available once you have your data arranged in a table format. One of these great tools is the Auto Filter command. In today's lesson, you'll learn how to use Auto Filter to limit your table information to just the records you want. Not only does Auto Filter allow for finding exact matches, but it can also filter and sort based on cell shading or font color. How great is that?

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Goal Seeking
Normally, you'll use your Excel workbooks as a place to enter formulas and get answers. But what if the formula isn't returning the answer you want? If you know what you want, but you just don't know what formula will get you there, then Excel's Goal Seek is exactly what you need. This tool will help you avoid the trial-and-error approach that most Excel users go through to get to the right answer. In this lesson, we'll walk through multiple examples together, exploring several ways to apply this great feature.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

PivotTables
Today, you'll learn how to use one of the best features of Excel: the PivotTable. If you've heard about PivotTables before, then you know what I mean. There's no greater what-if analysis tool to summarize, reorganize, and report data. When we practice creating a PivotTable, you'll discover how "pivoting" your data helps you gain valuable insights by seeing the same information from a different perspective. This is a lesson you won't want to miss!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Advanced PivotTables
Just like charting, Excel's PivotTables are too big a topic to fit into one lesson. So, today, we'll take PivotTables to the next level by taking a tour through some of Excel's more advanced techniques. You'll learn how quick and easy it is to group your data to give your PivotTable even more power. Then you'll find out how a PivotTable can serve as your source and inspiration for some really nice charts, specifically, the PivotChart. Last, you'll become an expert in using the Excel PivotTable filtering tool called Slicer.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Solver
Have you ever worked with a financial model in Excel and wondered how you could speculate different outcomes by changing different input amounts? The Excel Solver can do just that. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Solver to solve a complex problem based on the criteria and constraints we provide it. If you liked the Goal Seek lesson, then this Solver lesson is going to knock your socks off.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Sparklines
There's nothing more exciting than learning how to master a useful and eye-catching feature in Excel. In today's lesson, we'll explore in detail how to create all three types of Sparklines, as well as formatting options for each. By the end of the lesson, you'll have the skills to create dashboard-like mini charts sure to make you the envy of your office. If you enjoy creating charts, you'll really enjoy this lesson.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Macros
Today's topic is a student (and instructor) favorite. In this lesson, you'll find out how to use macros to turn boring, repetitive, time-consuming tasks into automated Excel functions. Tired of doing the same formatting on the same report month after month? Here's your chance to see how to record a macro that performs that time-consuming task in seconds with just one swift click of a button! How will you spend all the extra time that this lesson will save you?

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Introduction to Functions
If you've used Excel for a while, you know there are hundreds of functions at your disposal. We're going to spend the last three lessons of this course going over exactly how and why you'd use them. We'll start today by going through a quick overview of all the categories of functions and the different methods you can use to create them. Then, later in the lesson, we'll ease into creating various functions using some from the Text category.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Math/Trig Functions
Next to learning how to create macros, most students want to learn as much as they can about Excel functions. In today's lesson, we'll dig a little deeper into using some of the slightly more complex functions that you'll find in the Math & Trig category. Specifically, we'll look at two of my favorites, the SUMIF and COUNTIF functions, and discuss how to use one of the more complex functions, SUMIFS. If one of your objectives in taking this course is to learn more about functions, you're in for a treat!

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

VLOOKUP, INDEX, and MATCH Functions
Since functions are such an important and integral part of using Excel, we'll spend our final lesson going over a few more of them. Today, you're going to learn how to use the extremely popular VLOOKUP function. If you're already accustomed to using VLOOKUP, don't feel short-changed, because we're going to add to the complexity. We're going to use the INDEX and MATCH functions to do something just short of amazing. This is another lesson you won't want to miss!

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. It is not suitable for Mac users.

Software Requirements: 

  • PC: Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Excel, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

A basic understanding of Microsoft Excel use's and functions or completion of Introduction to Microsoft Excel is required.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Advanced Microsoft Excel 2010

Advanced Microsoft Excel 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Any proficient Microsoft Excel user will agree that this program is a very powerful analytical tool. Wouldn't it be great to learn how to effectively use all the advanced Excel features? In this practical and information-packed course, you'll see how to maximize this program's functions and capabilities.

Most organizations rely heavily on Excel to consolidate, analyze, and report financial information. Your company is probably no exception. By learning these advanced techniques, you can become more valuable to your organization.

You'll see how to work with the additional analytical tools provided by Excel add-ins and become skilled in using validation to protect the integrity of your worksheets from less experienced users. Impress your coworkers by learning how to add functional and eye-catching custom controls to any worksheet and how to use scenarios and data tables to quickly perform what-if data analyses. You'll discover advanced techniques for PivotTables, such as creating calculated fields and calculated items. Become adept at consolidating and importing external data, and master the art of conditional formatting to highlight duplicate entries and other common worksheet problems.  

Learn how Excel 2010 table tools take the complexity out of table creation and management. As you become proficient at nesting functions within other functions, you'll be able to accomplish just about anything Microsoft Excel has to offer!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Customizing Excel
Over the next six weeks, we're going to explore Microsoft Excel 2010's new and advanced features. You'll learn how to use data analysis tools and techniques to improve your decision making, and you'll practice generating accurate data more quickly. By the end of this course, you'll be well prepared to contribute more value to your organization with your advanced understanding of Excel. To kick things off, we'll spend this first lesson exploring how you can modify Excel to streamline processes and make your work easier. You'll use the Excel Options dialog box to customize some of Excel's behind-the-scenes behavior, set up your Quick Access Toolbar, and take a look at the new and improved status bar and its customizable features. Mastering these processes will lay the foundation for our exploration of advanced topics throughout the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Table Management
Today we'll explore some new table management features in Excel 2010, discuss how to use data forms with Excel databases, and look at a few alternative database techniques. You'll be glad to know that formatting and working with tables has gotten much easier in this latest version of Excel. Now, instead of applying filters, total rows, and formats separately, you can perform these actions through a single user interface. We'll delve into how it's done. You'll also learn how data forms provide a more user-friendly method for adding, deleting, and editing records in a table, and you'll practice using a data form to search for and view records that match specific criteria. We'll wrap things up with a brief look at some of the practical applications for data forms.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Data Validation
In this lesson, we'll tackle data validation techniques—your first line of defense against incorrect or missing data and the logical next step after data forms. You'll practice using whole number, decimal, date, time, list, and other forms of validation. After that, we'll explore the possibilities of custom validation, which allows you to apply validation on a cell or range of cells based on a formula you create. The possibilities for using it are limitless! You'll also learn how to create input messages and error alerts to guide the user's data entry, how to keep track of validation rules, and how to apply a custom validation rule to other cells so that you don't have to create it all over again.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Custom Controls
In the first three lessons, we covered what you might call intro-level advanced Excel topics, and now it's time to head into more complex territory. So, today, let's start working with custom controls—graphical objects that help facilitate data input and are sure to impress users. We'll start by getting your Ribbon set up to work with custom controls, and then we'll walk through some practice exercises. You'll learn how to create standard and drop-down list boxes, check boxes, option buttons, and group boxes. You'll also master the process of creating a dynamic list box, which allows you to control the values in one list box based on the values chosen by your user in a separate custom control.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Conditional Formatting
Today you'll discover how to use conditional formatting. And I'm not just talking about creating validation based on cell values. We'll do a quick review of that process, just as a refresher, but after that we're going to focus on formula conditional formatting. We'll work through nine different practice exercises that explore row conditional formatting, and we'll briefly discuss how the formula works after each exercise. You'll see how to use conditional formatting to hide errors, to highlight records based on multiple criteria, to track and alert you about due dates, to find the differences between two lists, to shade every other row (my personal favorite), and more. I think you'll especially enjoy learning how to set up a scorecard, which will show you problem areas in red, possible problems in yellow, and everything running smoothly in green. (Your manager will love this.)

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Consolidating and Outlining
In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Excel's consolidation function to efficiently summarize data from multiple sources. A lot of people do this the hard way, but with Excel's automatic consolidation feature, you'll no longer need to develop a web of formula links to multiple sources. Goodbye, potential for human error! We'll begin with an exercise on consolidating data within the same workbook, and after that, you'll practice consolidating using an advanced technique with category labels and wildcards. Next, we'll step things up with a practice exercise on consolidating from multiple workbooks. You'll also learn how to use automatic and manual outlining to view or hide different levels or sections of your information.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Excel Functions and Nesting
Excel's functions (or predefined calculations) are too numerous to completely cover in one lesson, so today we'll just focus on a few important ones spanning four categories: Logical, Database, Math & Trig, and Lookup & Reference. We'll start today with an overview of functions, take a look at the Insert Function dialog box, and then practice working with the IF function, nesting functions, the DSUM function, and the VLOOKUP function—all of which will come in handy when you need to perform a quick, thorough analysis of your data.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Import External Data
In this lesson, you'll find out all about importing external data. We'll begin with a practice exercise to get you comfortable with importing data from another Excel file, during which you'll see how to use the Microsoft Query Wizard. You'll test two methods for refreshing the target area for the imported data and find out how to edit an Excel query. After that, you'll do an import from an external database. Finally, you'll learn how to perform a Web query, which—you guessed it—allows you to import data from the Internet. The Web query feature is another fantastic feature in Excel 2010.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Data Tables
It's time to look at data tables, which let you compare the outcomes of different versions of the same formula without slogging through the process of calculating each of them. Data tables are very powerful what-if analysis tools that are great for analyzing potential outcomes of personal or business financial decisions. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use two types of data tables: a one-variable data table (which lets you substitute just one variable into the formula calculation) and the two-variable data table (which allows you to change multiple aspects of the formula).

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

What-If Analysis Tools
Today we'll explore three more of Excel's what-if analysis tools: Goal Seek, Scenario Manager, and Solver. You'll find out how to use Goal Seek to solve formulas backward—for example, you might want to do this if you knew the result you wanted but needed to determine how to change a single input cell in order to get that desired result. After that, we'll practice using Scenario Manager to create and save different input values and their results as scenarios (great for working on budgets). And finally, you'll put Excel's Solver to work to discover the optimal solution to models that have multiple variables and constraints.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Advanced PivotTables
In this lesson, you'll discover how to use PivotTables, which are excellent for summarizing massive amounts of data and viewing different cuts of the information quickly. There are two methods for creating PivotTables, and you'll practice using both. You'll also learn how to edit a PivotTable, how to filter the table to create individual reports, how to format a PivotTable to make it reader-friendly, and how to create and use calculated fields and items. After this, you'll create a PivotChart based on the data fields in your PivotTable. We may not be quite done with the course, but after mastering PivotTables and PivotCharts, you'll certainly be able to count yourself an advanced Excel user.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Analysis ToolPak, Advanced Filter, Array Formulas, and More!
We'll begin our final lesson with a look at the functions available in the Analysis ToolPak, including two of my favorites: the Moving Average and Sampling tools. You'll complete an exercise using advanced filters, and then I'll show you some of my favorite Excel tips and tricks. You'll find out how to work with the View Side by Side tool and how to use the Watch Window to keep tabs on your data when you're updating a workbook. We'll wrap things up with practice exercises using array formulas and the AutoSum Tool. When you're done with this lesson—and the course—you'll want to pass along the techniques you've learned to friends and colleagues who are still wrestling with Excel!
Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Microsoft Office Home and Student 2010, Microsoft Office Home and Business 2010Microsoft Office Professional 2010 are all acceptable (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, or XP. Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users. Completion of the online Intermediate Microsoft Excel 2010 course or a similar course is recommended.

Note: "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel 2010 will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Advanced Microsoft Excel 2013

Advanced Microsoft Excel 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Wouldn't it be great to learn how to effectively use all the advanced Excel features? In this practical and information-packed course, you'll see how to maximize this program's functions and capabilities.

Most organizations rely heavily on Excel to consolidate, analyze, and report financial information. Your company is probably no exception. By learning these advanced techniques, you can become more valuable to your organization.

You'll see how to work with the additional analysis tools provided by Excel add-ins and become skilled in using validation to protect the integrity of your worksheets from less experienced users. Impress your coworkers by learning how to add functional and eye-catching custom controls to any worksheet and how to use scenarios and data tables to quickly perform what-if data analyses. You'll discover advanced techniques for PivotTables, like creating Timelines, calculated fields, and calculated items. You'll learn how to use Excel's consolidation function to efficiently summarize data from multiple sources, become adept at importing external data, and master the art of conditional formatting to highlight duplicate entries and other common worksheet problems.

Learn how Excel 2013 table tools take the complexity out of table creation and management. As you become proficient at nesting functions within other functions, you'll be able to accomplish just about anything Microsoft Excel has to offer!



Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Customizing Excel
Over the next six weeks, we're going to explore Microsoft Excel 2013's sometimes-overlooked and advanced features. You'll learn how to use data analysis tools and techniques to improve your decision making, and you'll practice generating accurate data more quickly. By the end of this course, you'll be well prepared to contribute more value to your organization with your advanced understanding of Excel. To kick things off, we'll spend this first lesson exploring how you can modify Excel to streamline processes and make your work easier. You'll use the Excel Options dialog box to customize some of Excel's behind-the-scenes behavior, set up your Quick Access Toolbar, and take a look at the status bar and its customizable features. Mastering these processes will lay the foundation for our exploration of advanced topics throughout the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Table Management
Today we'll explore some great table management features in Excel 2013, discuss how to use data forms with Excel databases, and look at a few alternative database techniques. You'll be glad to know that formatting and working with tables has gotten much easier in this latest version of Excel. Now, instead of applying filters, total rows, and formats separately, you can perform these actions through a single user interface. We'll delve into how it's done. You'll also learn how data forms provide a more user-friendly method for adding, deleting, and editing records in a table, and you'll practice using a data form to search for and view records that match specific criteria. We'll wrap things up with a brief look at some of the practical applications for data forms.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Data Validation
In this lesson, we'll tackle data validation techniques—your first line of defense against incorrect or missing data and the logical next step after data forms. You'll practice using whole number, decimal, date, time, list, and other forms of validation. After that, we'll explore the possibilities of custom validation, which allows you to apply validation on a cell or range of cells based on a formula you create. The possibilities for using it are limitless! You'll also learn how to create input messages and error alerts to guide the user's data entry, how to keep track of validation rules, and how to apply a custom validation rule to other cells so that you don't have to create it all over again.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Custom Controls
In the first three lessons, we covered what you might call intro-level advanced Excel topics, and now it's time to head into more complex territory. So today, let's start working with custom controls—graphical objects that help facilitate data input and are sure to impress users. We'll start by getting your Ribbon set up to work with custom controls, and then we'll walk through some practice exercises. You'll learn how to create standard and drop-down list boxes, check boxes, option buttons, and group boxes. You'll also master the process of creating a dynamic list box, which allows you to control the values in one list box based on the values chosen by your user in a separate custom control.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Conditional Formatting
Today you'll discover how to use conditional formatting. And I'm not just talking about creating validation based on cell values. We'll do a quick review of that process, just as a refresher, but after that we're going to focus on formula conditional formatting. We'll work through nine different practice exercises that explore row conditional formatting, and we'll briefly discuss how the formula works after each exercise. You'll see how to use conditional formatting to hide errors, to highlight records based on multiple criteria, to track and alert you about due dates, to find the differences between two lists, to shade every other row (my personal favorite), and more. I think you'll especially enjoy learning how to set up a scorecard, which will show you problem areas in red, possible problems in yellow, and everything running smoothly in green. (Your manager will love this.)

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Consolidating and Outlining
In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Excel's consolidation function to efficiently summarize data from multiple sources. A lot of people do this the hard way, but with Excel's automatic consolidation feature, you'll no longer need to develop a web of formula links to multiple sources. Goodbye, potential for human error! We'll begin with an exercise on consolidating data within the same workbook, and after that, you'll practice consolidating using an advanced technique with category labels and wildcards. Next, we'll step things up with a practice exercise on consolidating from multiple workbooks. You'll also learn how to use automatic and manual outlining to view or hide different levels or sections of your information.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Excel Functions and Nesting

Excel's functions (or predefined calculations) are too numerous to completely cover in one lesson, so today we'll just focus on a few important ones spanning four categories: Logical, Database, Math & Trig, and Lookup & Reference. We'll start today with an overview of functions, take a look at the Insert Function dialog box, and then practice working with the IF function, nesting functions, the DSUM function, and the VLOOKUP function—all of which will come in handy when you need to perform a quick, thorough analysis of your data.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Import External Data
In this lesson, you'll find out all about importing external data. We'll begin with a practice exercise to get you comfortable with importing data from another Excel file, during which you'll see how to use the Microsoft Query Wizard. You'll test two methods for refreshing the target area for the imported data and find out how to edit an Excel query. After that, you'll do an import from an external database. Finally, you'll learn how to perform a Web query, which—you guessed it—allows you to import data from the Internet. The Web query feature is another fantastic feature in Excel 2013.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Data Tables
It's time to look at data tables, which let you compare the outcomes of different versions of the same formula without slogging through the process of calculating each of them. Data tables are very powerful what-if analysis tools that are great for analyzing potential outcomes of personal or business financial decisions. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use two types of data tables: a one-variable data table (which lets you substitute just one variable into the formula calculation) and the two-variable data table (which allows you to change multiple aspects of the formula).

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

What-If Analysis Tools
Today we'll explore three more of Excel's what-if analysis tools: Goal Seek, Scenario Manager, and Solver. You'll find out how to use Goal Seek to solve formulas backward—for example, you might want to do this if you knew the result you wanted but needed to determine how to change a single input cell in order to get that desired result. After that, we'll practice using Scenario Manager to create and save different input values and their results as scenarios (great for working on budgets). And finally, you'll put Excel's Solver to work to discover the optimal solution to models that have multiple variables and constraints.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Advanced PivotTables
In this lesson, you'll discover how to use PivotTables, which are excellent for summarizing massive amounts of data and viewing different cuts of the information quickly. There are two methods for creating PivotTables, and you'll practice using both. You'll also learn how to edit a PivotTable, how to filter the table to create individual reports, how to format a PivotTable to make it reader-friendly, how to insert a Timeline, and how to create and use calculated fields and items. After this, you'll create a PivotChart based on the data fields in your PivotTable. We may not be quite done with the course, but after mastering PivotTables and PivotCharts, you'll certainly be able to count yourself an advanced Excel user.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Analysis ToolPak, Advanced Filter, Array Formulas, and More!
We'll begin our final lesson with a look at the functions available in the Analysis ToolPak, including two of my favorites: the Moving Average and Sampling tools. You'll complete an exercise using advanced filters, and then I'll show you some of my favorite Excel tips and tricks. You'll find out how to work with the View Side by Side tool and how to use the Watch Window to keep tabs on your data when you're updating a workbook. We'll wrap things up with practice exercises using array formulas and the AutoSum Tool. When you're done with this lesson—and the course—you'll want to pass along the techniques you've learned to friends and colleagues who are still wrestling with Excel!

Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8Microsoft Excel 2013 or Microsoft Office 2013 (Office Home and Student 2013, Office Professional Plus 2013, or Office Home and Business 2013, ) are all acceptable.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users who are using the Office Mac Home versions or for users of older versions of Microsoft Excel. "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel 2013 will not  work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Advanced Microsoft Excel 2016

Advanced Microsoft Excel 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Wouldn't it be great to learn how to effectively use all the advanced Excel features? In this practical and information-packed course, you'll see how to maximize this program's functions and capabilities.

Most organizations rely heavily on Excel to consolidate, analyze, and report financial information. Your company is probably no exception. By learning these advanced techniques, you can become more valuable to your organization.

You'll see how to work with the additional analysis tools provided by Excel add-ins and become skilled in using validation to protect the integrity of your worksheets from less experienced users. Impress your coworkers by learning how to add functional and eye-catching custom controls to any worksheet and how to use scenarios and data tables to quickly perform what-if data analysis. You'll discover ways to work with databases and advanced techniques for PivotTables, like creating Timelines, calculated fields, and calculated items. You'll learn how to use Excel's consolidation function to efficiently summarize data from multiple sources, become adept at importing external data using Excel's built-in Power Query tool, and master the art of conditional formatting to highlight duplicate entries and other common worksheet problems.

Learn how Excel 2016 table tools take the complexity out of table creation and management. As you become proficient at nesting functions within other functions, you'll be able to accomplish just about anything Microsoft Excel has to offer!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Customizing Excel
Over the next six weeks, we're going to explore Microsoft Excel's sometimes-overlooked and advanced features. You'll learn how to use data analysis tools and techniques to improve your decision making, and you'll practice generating accurate data more quickly. By the end of this course, you'll be well prepared to contribute more value to your organization with your advanced understanding of Excel. To kick things off, we'll spend this first lesson exploring how you can modify Excel to streamline processes and make your work easier. You'll use the Excel Options dialog box to customize some of Excel's behind-the-scenes behavior, set up your Quick Access Toolbar, and take a look at the status bar and its customizable features. Mastering these processes will lay the foundation for our exploration of advanced topics throughout the course.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Table Management
Today we'll explore some great table management features in Excel, discuss how to use data forms with Excel databases, and look at a few alternative database techniques. You'll be glad to know that formatting and working with tables has gotten much easier in this latest version of Excel. Now, instead of applying filters, total rows, and formats separately, you can perform these actions through a single user interface. We'll delve into how it's done. You'll also learn how data forms provide a more user-friendly method for adding, deleting, and editing records in a table, and you'll practice using a data form to search for and view records that match specific criteria. We'll wrap things up with a brief look at some of the practical applications for data forms.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Data Validation
In this lesson, we'll tackle data validation techniques—your first line of defense against incorrect or missing data and the logical next step after data forms. You'll practice using whole number, decimal, date, time, list, and other forms of validation. After that, we'll explore the possibilities of custom validation, which allows you to apply validation on a cell or range of cells based on a formula you create. The possibilities for using it are limitless! You'll also learn how to create input messages and error alerts to guide the user's data entry, how to keep track of validation rules, and how to apply a custom validation rule to other cells so that you don't have to create it all over again.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Custom Controls
In the first three lessons, we covered what you might call intro-level advanced Excel topics, and now it's time to head into more complex territory. So today, let's start working with custom controls—graphical objects that help facilitate data input and are sure to impress users. We'll start by getting your Ribbon set up to work with custom controls, and then we'll walk through some practice exercises. You'll learn how to create standard and drop-down list boxes, check boxes, option buttons, and group boxes. You'll also master the process of creating a dynamic list box, which allows you to control the values in one list box based on the values chosen by your user in a separate custom control.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Conditional Formatting
Today you'll discover how to use conditional formatting. And I'm not just talking about creating validation based on cell values. We'll do a quick review of that process, just as a refresher, but after that we're going to focus on formula conditional formatting. We'll work through nine different practice exercises that explore row conditional formatting, and we'll briefly discuss how the formula works after each exercise. You'll see how to use conditional formatting to hide errors, to highlight records based on multiple criteria, to track and alert you about due dates, to find the differences between two lists, to shade every other row (my personal favorite), and more. I think you'll especially enjoy learning how to set up a scorecard, which will show you problem areas in red, possible problems in yellow, and everything running smoothly in green. (Your manager will love this.)

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Consolidating and Outlining
In this lesson, you'll learn how to use Excel's consolidation function to efficiently summarize data from multiple sources. A lot of people do this the hard way, but with Excel's automatic consolidation feature, you'll no longer need to develop a web of formula links to multiple sources. Goodbye, potential for human error! We'll begin with an exercise on consolidating data within the same workbook, and after that, you'll practice consolidating using an advanced technique with category labels and wildcards. Next, we'll step things up with a practice exercise on consolidating from multiple workbooks. You'll also learn how to use automatic and manual outlining to view or hide different levels or sections of your information.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Excel Functions and Nesting

Excel's functions (or predefined calculations) are too numerous to completely cover in one lesson, so today we'll just focus on a few important ones spanning four categories: Logical, Database, Math & Trig, and Lookup & Reference. We'll start today with an overview of functions, take a look at the Insert Function dialog box, and then practice working with the IF function, nesting functions, the DSUM function, and the VLOOKUP function—all of which will come in handy when you need to perform a quick, thorough analysis of your data.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Import External Data
In this lesson, you'll find out all about importing external data. We'll begin with a practice exercise to get you comfortable with importing data from another Excel file, during which you'll see how to use the built-in Query Editor, which used to be an optional add-in known as Power Query. You'll test two methods for refreshing the target area for the imported data and find out how to edit any type of query. After that, you'll do an import from an external database that combines two database tables into a single import. Finally, you'll learn how to perform a Web query, which—you guessed it—allows you to import data from the Internet. The Web query feature is another fantastic feature in Excel.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Data Tables
It's time to look at data tables, which let you compare the outcomes of different versions of the same formula without slogging through the process of calculating each of them. Data tables are very powerful what-if analysis tools that are great for analyzing potential outcomes of personal or business financial decisions. In this lesson, you'll learn how to use two types of data tables: a one-variable data table (which lets you substitute just one variable into the formula calculation) and the two-variable data table (which allows you to change multiple aspects of the formula).

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

What-If Analysis Tools
Today we'll explore three more of Excel's what-if analysis tools: Goal Seek, Scenario Manager, and Solver. You'll find out how to use Goal Seek to solve formulas backward—for example, you might want to do this if you knew the result you wanted but needed to determine how to change a single input cell in order to get that desired result. After that, we'll practice using Scenario Manager to create and save different input values and their results as scenarios (great for working on budgets). And finally, you'll put Excel's Solver to work to discover the optimal solution to models that have multiple variables and constraints.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Advanced PivotTables
In this lesson, you'll discover how to use PivotTables, which are excellent for summarizing massive amounts of data and viewing different cuts of the information quickly. There are two methods for creating PivotTables, and you'll practice using both. You'll also learn how to edit a PivotTable, how to filter the table to create individual reports, how to format a PivotTable to make it reader-friendly, how to insert a Timeline, and how to create and use calculated fields and items. After this, you'll create a PivotChart based on the data fields in your PivotTable. We may not be quite done with the course, but after mastering PivotTables and PivotCharts, you'll certainly be able to count yourself an advanced Excel user.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Analysis ToolPak, Advanced Filter, Array Formulas, and More!
We'll begin our final lesson with a look at the functions available in the Analysis ToolPak, including two of my favorites: the Moving Average and Sampling tools. You'll complete an exercise using advanced filters, and then I'll show you some of my favorite Excel tips and tricks. You'll find out how to work with the View Side by Side tool and how to use the Watch Window to keep tabs on your data when you're updating a workbook. We'll wrap things up with practice exercises using array formulas and the AutoSum Tool. When you're done with this lesson—and the course—you'll want to pass along the techniques you've learned to friends and colleagues who are still wrestling with Excel!
Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or Microsoft Windows 10; Microsoft Office Home and Student 2016 or Microsoft Office 365 are acceptable. A free 30-day trial of Office 365 Home Premium may be available at (https://office.microsoft.com/en-us/try/). Then, a subscription can be purchased for as little as $9.99 per month. Please be sure to install the software on your computer before the course begins.

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users, users of older versions of Microsoft Excel, or users of OpenOffice.

Note:  "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.

 

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Advanced Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365

Advanced Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Most organizations rely heavily on Microsoft Excel to consolidate, analyze, and report financial information and other important data. Your company is probably no exception. If you work with data of any kind, learning Excel’s advanced functions to taking on greater responsibilities in your organization.

This course will help you master many features in Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365 that most users don't know exist. You will learn the secret to using formula-based conditional formatting as a creative solution to common issues. You will also learn how to leverage Excel’s Power Query tool to import and transform data from about any data source. By the time you finish this course, you will have mastered Microsoft Excel 2019/Office 365 and will be able to better serve your company’s data management needs.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Customizing Excel
To kick things off, your first lesson explores different ways you can modify Excel to streamline processes and make your work easier. You will use the Excel Options dialog box to customize some of Excel's behind-the-scenes behavior and set up your Quick Access Toolbar.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Table Management
This lesson explores Excel’s table management features, using data forms with Excel databases, and alternative database techniques. You will be glad to know that formatting and working with tables has gotten much easier in this latest version of Excel.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Data Validation
In this lesson, you will tackle data validation techniques—your first line of defense against incorrect or missing data and the logical next step after data forms. You will practice using whole number, decimal, date, time, list, and other forms of validation.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Custom Controls
This lesson will introduce you to custom controls—graphical objects that help facilitate data input and are sure to impress users. You will learn how to create standard and drop-down list boxes, check boxes, option buttons, and group boxes.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Conditional Formatting
This lesson will teach you how to use conditional formatting. You will learn how to use conditional formatting to hide errors, to highlight records based on multiple criteria, to track and alert you about due dates, to find the differences between two lists, to shade every other row, and more.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Consolidating and Outlining
In this lesson, you will learn how to use Excel's consolidation function to efficiently summarize data from multiple sources. Many Excel users do this the hard way, but with Excel's automatic consolidation feature, you will no longer need to develop a web of formula links to multiple sources.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Excel Functions and Nesting
Excel's functions are too numerous to cover in just one lesson, so this lesson focuses on a few important ones spanning four categories: Logical, Database, Math & Trig, and Lookup & Reference.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Import External Data
This lesson focuses on importing external data. You will learn how to use the built-in Query Editor using Excel’s powerful Power Query tool and import external database that combines two database tables into a single import.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Data Tables
Data tables are very powerful what-if analysis tools that are great for analyzing potential outcomes of personal or business financial decisions. In this lesson, you will learn how to use two different types of data tables.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

What-If Analysis Tools
This lesson explores three more of Excel's what-if analysis tools: Goal Seek, Scenario Manager, and Solver.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Advanced PivotTables
In this lesson, you will discover how to use PivotTables, which are excellent for summarizing massive amounts of data and viewing different cuts of the information quickly. There are two methods for creating PivotTables, and you will practice using both.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Analysis ToolPak, Advanced Filter, Array Formulas, and More!
Your final lesson with a look at the functions available in the Analysis ToolPak, including Moving Average and Sampling tools. You will learn how to use the View Side by Side tool and how to use the Watch Window to keep tabs on your data when you're updating a workbook.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: This course must be taken on a PC. It is not suitable for Mac users.

Software Requirements: 

  • PC: Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Excel, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment) 
    • Note: The "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Excel will not work with the full version of Excel taught in this course.
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other: Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites: A basic understanding of Microsoft Excel’s uses and functions or completion of Introduction to Microsoft Excel & Intermediate Microsoft Excel.

Instructional Material Requirements: The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
What's New in Microsoft Office 2013

What's New in Microsoft Office 2013

$190 + applicable tax

In this course, you'll learn how to use the exciting new features of Microsoft Office 2013, including Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access, Outlook, OneNote, and Publisher, using step-by-step, easy-to-follow instructions. With this latest version of the Microsoft Office, you'll be able to store and share your work "in the cloud" on Microsoft SkyDrive, a great, free online location that lets you access your files from any computer.  

You'll explore Word, where you'll get experience using the new Start screen, templates, and Ribbon commands. You'll master new features in graphics, movies, and tables as well as the new Reviewing features and Office apps (some great mini-programs you can add to Office), and learn how you can work with PDFs in Word.   

In Excel, you'll learn to speed up your work using the Quick Analysis tool, Flash Fill, and some great new chart features. You'll also get an orientation to PivotTables and explore a few new PivotTable tricks.  

In PowerPoint, you'll discover new ways to make your presentations look better than ever, including themes, graphics, shapes, colors, and animation. You'll also learn how to use the new Presenter view and commenting features, and how to present your slide show in an online meeting. 

In Access, you'll get acquainted with WebApps, which are Access databases you can put online and share with others who can use it with their Web browsers—they don't even need Access to use it! We'll also take a quick spin through the new features of the Office email program, Outlook.  

In addition, we'll explore often-overlooked but really valuable note-taking program, OneNote, as well as the easy-to-use page layout program, Publisher. And we'll top everything off with a bonus lesson on how to use some of the Office programs together, a skill known as integration. Before you know it, you'll be using each MS Office 2013 program with ease, and working more efficiently with cloud computing!

 

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Introducing Office 2013 and the Cloud
Microsoft Office 2013 adds new capabilities and a new look to the features of Office 2010. In addition, Office 2013 lets you store and work on your documents "in the cloud," making it easier to work from different locations and to share your work with others. In this lesson, you'll take a peek at the new look of Office 2013 and then learn about working with Office programs and documents in the cloud.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

A Tour of Word 2013 Startup and Graphics Features
Microsoft Word offers several new startup features, including a Start screen and templates. Its enhanced cloud connectivity appears when you open and save files. A new view and improved graphics capabilities make it easier to view and work with pictures and videos. In this lesson, you'll use these features in both a short and a long document

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Formatting and Sharing Word Documents
Word 2013 makes working with tables easier than ever, with new border choices and a new easy way to add rows and columns. And when you finish formatting, you'll most likely want to share your documents with others, often to get their responses to your work. In this lesson, you'll learn about new Word reviewing features that make this faster. We'll explore Office apps, which help you extend what you can do in the program. You'll also learn that Word 2013 features the ability to open PDF documents so that you can edit them right inside of Word. Last, we'll look at file compatibility.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

­­­­Introducing Microsoft Excel 2013
Like Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel 2013 has added some important new features that can help speed up your work. You'll see that the Excel screen elements are similar to those you saw earlier in Word. We'll also go over new data analysis tools that let you preview various data relationships before you choose one. Combine these with new chart formatting tools and the ability to create slicers from tables, and you'll find better ways of communicating your data more clearly than ever before.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

­­­­More New Excel Features
In this lesson, you'll begin by exploring changes to Excel PivotTables and PivotCharts, after a quick review. You'll also learn a great new PivotTable feature called the Timeline. We'll then move on to workbook sharing and then experience some of the new apps for Excel. Finally, you'll look at sharing workbooks and the new procedure for creating and saving you own templates.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

­­­­Getting to Know New PowerPoint Graphics Tools
Today, you'll look at the PowerPoint Start screen templates and then open a presentation. There you'll learn about themes and theme variants, you'll examine new slide formats, and you'll look at how the Ribbon tabs have changed. Then you'll explore several new tools that let you add and work with graphics in less time.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

PowerPoint's New Formatting, Animation, and Slide Show Features
Today, you'll gain experience in formatting slide backgrounds, formatting pictures, and presenting in Slide Show view. I'll then introduce you to the new Presenter view, which lets you practice and present your show using new tools. We'll then turn to the new comment features, which allow you to more easily exchange information with people who review your presentation. Finally, we'll look at new animation features that let you create custom animations more easily.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Creating Access Web Apps
Access 2013 has one big new feature: It lets you create Web apps, which are online databases that other people can open and work with using a Web browser. In this lesson, we'll do a quick review of Access and then create two Web apps. You'll need Access 2013 and a SharePoint server address, which you can get by signing up for a free trial of an Office 365 subscription.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

­­­­Learning New Outlook Features
In this lesson, you'll look at the most important new features in Outlook 2013, including improvements to the email, contacts (now called people), calendar, and tasks areas. Some areas have been renamed, and some have gotten a new look to help you communicate more efficiently with others. Finally, we'll look at ways of customizing the screens in the major Outlook areas so that you can always have the information you need at your fingertips.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

­­­­What's New With OneNote 2013
In this lesson, I'll introduce you to the basics of OneNote 2013, including creating a notebook, tabs, and pages. You'll then see the major new features, including creating and tagging text, creating tables with shading, converting tables to Excel spreadsheets, and inserting existing Excel spreadsheets. Finally, you'll learn about sending information to OneNote from other programs and exporting notebooks.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

­­­­What's New in Microsoft Publisher 2013
In this lesson, we'll look at the new features of Microsoft Publisher 2013, including new templates and new text and graphics formatting options. We'll cover fills, outlines, and special effects such as shadows, reflections, glows, and bevels. These effects offer countless combinations that let you make your text and graphics truly distinctive. You'll learn to easily swap images in a publication and make any image into a page background. Finally, you'll learn how to save any publication as a graphic file that you can send to any photo printer.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Integrating Office Information
In this lesson, you'll learn how to perform basic integration techniques, which let you reuse information between the Office programs. We'll compare and contrast pasting, embedding, and linking and get some hands-on experience as you integrate spreadsheet cells and a chart into a Word report. Finally, you learn to create an entire PowerPoint presentation in an instant from a Word outline.

Microsoft Office 2013 Professional, containing Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access, OneNote, Outlook, and Publisher (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins);Windows 8, Windows 8.1, or Windows 7 [Not supported on Macintosh]. If you are using Office Home & Student or Office Home and Business, you can read the chapters about Outlook, Access, and Publisher, without keystroking them. It's not a good idea to have two versions of Office on the same machine, so if you do download it, try it on a second machine.  

All versions of Office 2013 require one of the following operating systems: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows Server 2012. Note that earlier versions of Windows are not supported. 

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

*Prior experience with at least two Microsoft Office 2003, 2007, or 2010 programs is recommended.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Outlook 2010

Introduction to Microsoft Outlook 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Are you overwhelmed by emails, meetings, and to-do lists? Harness the power of Microsoft Outlook 2010, and you'll instantly enhance your efficiency and productivity. 

In this course, you'll learn your way around the new ribbon-based interface and get up and running quickly. Then you'll focus on the core skills you really need in order to work smarter and faster.

First, you'll learn how to manage the flood of emails you receive, creating folders and archives so you can always find what you need. Then you'll discover how to keep track of your contacts and how to use Outlook's Calendar and Alert features. You'll also find out how to customize Outlook so it perfectly meets your needs, and you'll discover how to automate your work with rules.

As a bonus, you'll get insider tips that will make you the Outlook guru in your office. For example, did you know that you can create, send, and receive email messages without ever touching the mouse? You'll find out how, and learn lots of other tricks for getting the most out of Outlook's versatile tools. 

Whether you're new to Outlook or you've been using it for years, you're sure to learn something useful in every lesson. In just a few weeks, you'll be a skilled and confident user of this time-saving tool—and you'll never have to worry about missing a meeting, losing an email, or forgetting an important task again!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Outlook 2010 Basics
In this lesson, you’ll pick up some of the fundamentals of this big, powerful program. You’ll jump right in and get your hands dirty by playing with the user interface and learning a couple of different ways to navigate between the major sections that we’ll be covering over the next six weeks. And just in case something comes up where you need immediate help, we’ll go over how you can activate Outlook’s help systems and get answers in seconds.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Mail View and E-Mail
Today we're going to dig into the section of Outlook 2010 where most people spend most of their time: Mail view. Not surprisingly, Mail view is the place where you work with e-mail messages, and once we go over some of the mechanics of the view itself, we'll spend the rest of our time on the basics of e-mail. We'll cover sending, receiving, and replying to messages, as well as how you can use the spell-checker and signatures to give your messages some class.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

More Mail View
In this lesson, we're going to address a few more aspects of working in Mail view and with e-mail messages. First we'll look at desktop alerts, flags, and categories. The desktop alerts notify you when new messages arrive, while the flags and categories will help you stay organized and make sure you don't forget to do something important with your messages. We'll also look at how messages are used to transport files around the Internet, and wrap up the lesson with something that most people never figure out about messages.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Contact View and Contacts
It's time to move our attention from e-mail over to the related subject of contacts. By the end of this lesson, you'll be able to find your way around Outlook's Contacts views. More importantly, you'll know what contacts can do, and how to use them to keep track of all sorts of information. From there we'll look at Contact Groups, Outlook 2010's replacement for Distribution Lists. To wrap things up, we'll talk a bit about Address Books, an approach to contacting people by e-mail that you'll likely encounter (even if you don't realize it) when using Outlook in a corporate environment.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With the Calendar View
So far in the course, we've dealt with communication-related topics like e-mail and contacts. Now we're going off in another direction. Outlook 2010 has a flexible and easy-to-use Calendar that helps you track and manage all the stuff you need to get done. In this lesson we focus on the basics of using the Calendar, scheduling appointments and meetings, and tracking events. We'll also look at two powerful tools that make working with the Calendar more efficient: the Date Navigator and the Daily Task List. By the time we're done today, you will know what you need to know to be able to use your default Outlook Calendar to manage your personal schedule.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

More Calendar View
This lesson is a continuation of our work with Calendar view. Specifically, we cover how to create and work with multiple Calendars at once. This leads us to two new features of Outlook 2010, Calendar Groups and Schedule View. You'll learn why these were created, and how they can help you deal with large numbers of Calendars without going crazy from information overload. Last but not least, we look at sharing Calendars through e-mail and on the Internet. At the end of this lesson you will not only wrap up your study of Calendar view; you will have reached the halfway point in the course.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Working With Tasks and To-Dos
This lesson is about getting things done. Outlook tasks and to-dos are ways to keep track of what you need to get done. Tasks are pretty much what you would expect—items that you create to keep track of some particular task. To-dos are somewhat more interesting in that they are Outlook's way of tracking things you need to do something about without creating a special task for them. By the time we're done today you will clearly understand the difference between tasks and to-dos, and know how to work with the To-Do Bar, Outlook's way of constantly reminding you of the things you need to get done next.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Exploring Notes, Shortcuts, and Folders
Outlook 2010 is all about communication. But it is all about storing and managing information, too. In this lesson, we look at three aspects of Outlook that help with these essential tasks. Notes give us a way to keep track of all those little random bits of information that otherwise would end up on scraps of paper all over the place. And speaking of random stuff, we have shortcuts and the Shortcuts Pane. With these, you can effectively create your own custom Navigation Pane, one that points to the Outlook items most important to you. Even better, you can use shortcuts to point to stuff that's outside of Outlook, meaning you can organize information that's anywhere on your computer, the company network, even out on the Internet. Finally, we begin learning about folders. Folders let you organize the masses of information that you can accumulate in Outlook, while the Folder List lets you find them all again. This discussion lays the groundwork for Lesson 9, where folders are revealed to be a key part of automating your work in Outlook.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Getting Organized With Categories, Folders, and Rules
One of the great things about Outlook is that you can use it for so much of your communications and personal information. But with so many messages, contacts, tasks, notes, and other pieces of information in one place, organizing and managing it for easy and efficient access can be a big chore. In this lesson, you'll learn how Outlook 2010's flexible category system and rules can help you manage the flood of information that flows into your Inbox every day. You'll also learn how to print from Outlook for those rare occasions where you just have to have information on paper.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Archiving Stuff and Finding the Info You Need
As you use Outlook 2010 more and more you'll eventually reach the point where you need to store old items for future reference. You'll also get to the point where it's hard to find the information you need because Outlook contains so much. In this lesson, we'll learn about the tools Outlook gives you to automatically archive your old items as well as three different tools for finding those items you know are in there somewhere.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Outlook 2010 Tips You'll Enjoy
Outlook 2010 does a lot of things, and it often gives you multiple ways to do each of them. And beyond the basics, it can do many things that we can't possibly cover in a six-week course. But that doesn't mean we can't look at some cool tips that can make working with Outlook 2010 faster, easier, or just more fun. This is exactly what you'll do in this lesson. I think you're going to enjoy it.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Customizing Outlook 2010
Outlook 2010 offers several customization options that you can take advantage of without having to learn programming or develop advanced technical skills. This lesson covers several customizations that you may find useful.
You will need Microsoft Outlook 2010. (Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.) You will also need Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7.
 
Note: this course is not suitable for Macintosh users.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Outlook 2013

Introduction to Microsoft Outlook 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Want to learn Microsoft Outlook 2013 quickly? Want to become a confident and productive user of this powerful program without having to memorize a lot of technical mumbo-jumbo? In this course, you'll see what's new in Outlook 2013 and get up and running with the most important aspects of the program, starting with mastering the new Windows 8 style look and feel. From there, you'll quickly learn how to manage your email, calendar, and contacts, and how to streamline and automate your work with keyboard shortcuts, rules, Search Folders, and Quick Steps.  

The goal of this course is to teach you what you really need to know to be productive with Outlook 2013. That means you won't waste your time on low-value aspects of Outlook. Instead, you'll focus on the important things like sending, receiving, and managing your mail, and using tools such as the calendar, tasks, and to-dos so you can manage your schedule and get your work done. You'll also learn about the redesigned Contacts section of Outlook (now called People). You'll discover how Outlook can connect to your social networks, and discuss the pros and cons of making those connections. 

The course also shares secrets about how to get the most from Outlook. For example, did you know that you can create, send, and receive email messages without ever touching the mouse? It's faster and more efficient, and can even reduce some of the strain on your aching mouse hand. Introduction to Outlook 2013 dedicates an entire lesson to the instructor's favorite Outlook tips and tricks. Whether you're new to Outlook or you've been using it for years, you're sure to learn something useful in every lesson.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Outlook 2013 Basics
In this lesson, you'll pick up some of the fundamentals of this big, powerful program. You'll jump right in and get your hands dirty by playing with the user interface and learning a couple of different ways to navigate between the major sections that we'll be covering over the next six weeks. And just in case something comes up where you need immediate help, we'll go over how you can activate Outlook's help systems and get answers in seconds.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Mail View and Email
Today we're going to dig into the section of Outlook 2013 where most people spend most of their time: Mail view. Not surprisingly, Mail view is the place where you work with email messages, and once we go over some of the mechanics of the view itself, we'll spend the rest of our time on the basics of email. We'll cover sending, receiving, and replying to messages, as well as how you can use the spell-checker and signatures to give your messages some class.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

More Mail View
In this lesson, we're going to address a few more aspects of working in Mail view and with email messages. First we'll look at alerts, flags, and categories. The alerts notify you when new messages arrive, while the flags and categories will help you stay organized and make sure you don't forget to do something important with your messages. We'll also look at how the mail protocol used by your email service to connect to Outlook can affect the way these features function. Then we'll look at how messages are used to transport files around the Internet (that is, how attachments work), and wrap up the lesson with something that most people never figure out about messages.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Contact View and Contacts
It's time to move our attention from email over to the related subject of contacts. By the end of this lesson, you'll be well on your way to mastery of Outlook 2013's new People view and the contacts that reside therein. More importantly, you'll know what contacts can do, and how to use them to keep track of all sorts of information. From there, we'll look at Contact Groups, including their benefits and pitfalls. To wrap things up, we'll talk a bit about Address Books, an approach to contacting people by email that you'll likely encounter (even if you don't realize it) when using Outlook in a corporate environment.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Social Networks
In this lesson, we'll complete our study of the People hub by exploring how Outlook connects to social networks. But we'll do more than just look at how you set up this connection. We'll spend a significant part of the lesson discussing the pros and cons of connecting Outlook to networks like Facebook, particularly when you use Outlook for work and Facebook for play. Once we get a connection set up, we'll look at how this information appears in both the relevant contacts and in email messages to and from known contacts.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Calendar View
So far in the course, we've dealt with communication-related topics like email and contacts. Now we're going off in another direction. Outlook 2013 has a flexible and easy-to-use Calendar that helps you track and manage all the stuff you need to get done. In this lesson, we focus on the basics of using the Calendar, scheduling appointments and meetings, and tracking events. We'll also look at two powerful tools that make working with the Calendar more efficient: Calendar Groups and Schedule view. By the time we're done today, you'll know what you need to know to be able to use one or more Outlook Calendars efficiently. This lesson not only gives you all the info you need about using Calendars—by the time you finish, you'll have reached the halfway point in the course.!

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Working With Tasks and To-Dos
This lesson is about getting things done. Outlook tasks and to-dos are ways to keep track of what you need to get done. Tasks are pretty much what you'd expect—items that you create to keep track of some particular task. To-dos are somewhat more interesting in that they are Outlook's way of tracking things you need to do something about without creating a special task for them. By the time we're done today, you'll clearly understand the difference between tasks and to-dos and know how to work with the To-Do Bar and the Daily Task List, Outlook's two ways of constantly reminding you of the things you need to get done next.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Exploring Notes, Shortcuts, and Folders
Outlook 2013 is all about communication. But it is all about storing and managing information, too. In this lesson, we look at three aspects of Outlook that help with these essential tasks. Notes give us a way to keep track of all those little random bits of information that otherwise would end up on scraps of paper all over the place. And speaking of random stuff, we have shortcuts and the Shortcuts Pane. With these, you can effectively create your own custom Folder Pane, one that points to the Outlook items most important to you. Even better, you can use shortcuts to point to stuff that's outside of Outlook, meaning you can organize information that's anywhere on your computer, the company network, even out on the Internet. Finally, we begin learning about folders. Folders let you organize the masses of information that you can accumulate in Outlook, while the Folder List lets you find them all again. This discussion lays the groundwork for Lesson 9, where folders are revealed to be a key part of automating your work in Outlook.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Getting Organized With Categories, Folders, and Rules
One of the great things about Outlook is that you can use it for so much of your communications and personal information. But with so many messages, contacts, tasks, notes, and other pieces of information in one place, organizing and managing it for easy and efficient access can be a big chore. In this lesson, you'll learn how Outlook 2013's flexible category system and rules can help you manage the flood of information that flows into your Inbox every day. You'll also learn how to print from Outlook for those rare occasions where you just have to have information on paper.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Archiving Stuff and Finding the Info You Need

As you use Outlook 2013 more and more, you'll eventually reach the point where you need to store old items for future reference. You'll also get to the point where it's hard to find the information you need because Outlook contains so much. In this lesson, we'll learn about the tools Outlook gives you to automatically archive your old items as well as three different tools for finding those items you know are in there somewhere.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Outlook 2013 Tips You'll Enjoy

Outlook 2013 does a lot of things, and it often gives you multiple ways to do each of them. And beyond the basics, it can do many things that we can't possibly cover in a six-week course. But that doesn't mean we can't look at some cool tips that can make working with Outlook 2013 faster, easier, or just more fun. This is exactly what you'll do in this lesson. I think you're going to enjoy it.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Customizing Outlook 2013

Outlook 2013 offers several customization options that you can take advantage of without having to learn programming or develop advanced technical skills. This lesson covers several customizations that you may find useful.

Microsoft Office Outlook 2013 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating system.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2010

Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Take your PowerPoint presentations from "so-so" to sensational! In these lessons, you'll learn how to use Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 to create professional-quality slide presentations that grab and hold your audience's attention from start to finish. 

First, you'll explore the latest features of PowerPoint, from the all-new File menu to the Backstage View. After that, you'll find out how to create dazzling presentations formatted with themes and a variety of slide layouts. You'll embellish your slides with text, objects, SmartArt, multimedia, animation, sound, charts, clip art, and hyperlinks, and you'll discover that global changes are a snap with the Slide Master. 

In addition, you'll find out how to download an online image and insert it onto a slide. You'll also discover how to edit clip art, images, WordArt, and shapes easily with the commands on the Ribbon. You'll explore the printing interface in Backstage View, and find out how to view your presentations in the new Reading View.  

And that's just the start! You'll also learn how to create a PowerPoint photo album with your digital pictures, and you'll work with PowerPoint Web App—an online version of PowerPoint. Finally, you'll add versatility to your PowerPoint skills as you learn to save presentations as PDF files and videos. 

Whether you're a beginner or an experienced user, these lessons will teach you how to turn simple slides into a polished and exciting presentation that will make your message memorable. If you want to take your PowerPoint skills to a higher level, this is the course for you!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

The PowerPoint 2010 Interface
Come explore the basic features of Microsoft PowerPoint 2010! You'll learn about the Ribbon, which replaces the menu and toolbars so common in other programs written for the Windows operating system. You'll find out how to plan a presentation and start the PowerPoint program. And you'll practice working with different views, task panes, tabs, and templates.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating Presentations
Now that you know the basics of PowerPoint, it's time to create a presentation from scratch. We'll start by choosing a theme for the presentation and slide layouts. You'll find out about the Live Preview feature, and we'll discuss how to save a file so you can find it later. You'll also create and edit slides in the slide pane and the Outline tab. Finally, we'll go over the ways to put on a slide show. Important stuff in Lesson 2!

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Working With Table Slides
Including tables in your presentation lets you present a lot of information in a little space. So in this lesson, you'll add, revise, and reformat tables. I'll also show you multiple ways to open a presentation. Then, I'll teach you how to preserve different versions of your work by using different filenames.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating and Printing Error-free Presentations
Today we'll cover two topics: printing and proofreading. You'll learn to print your presentation as slides, handouts, an outline, and notes pages. This versatility will really help you connect with audience members! And to make sure your printed presentation is as close to perfect as it can be, we'll explore the spelling checker, the AutoCorrect feature, the Research task pane, and the thesaurus.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Using Media Clips
We're going to switch gears in this lesson and work with images instead of text, which I think you'll enjoy. I'll show you how to embellish your slides with media clips, which could include illustrations, clip art, photographs, videos, or audio clips. You'll even learn how to download an image from a website and insert the image on a slide.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

WordArt, Shapes, and SmartArt
You're going to work with WordArt, Shapes, and SmartArt objects in this lesson, which I think you'll find exciting. It's fun to transform text into colorful WordArt objects and to draw and fill shapes with color and special effects. You'll learn to group and edit the objects you create. And you'll add visual sophistication to your slides with SmartArt features—including Venn diagrams, flow charts, and more.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Creating and Editing a Chart
In this lesson, you'll create and edit a chart slide to illustrate statistical data. You'll find this lesson easy if you like working with numbers! But if you don't enjoy math, that's okay—I'll walk you through everything you need to know and do to create a chart slide. I'll also show you how to change the look of your chart by using Shape Fill, Shape Outline, and Shape Effects.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Making Global Changes
Making the same changes to dozens of PowerPoint slides is boring and time-consuming. Today we'll look at global changes you can make to your slides, handouts, and notes. For example, if you want to increase or decrease the font size on all the slides in a presentation, just make the change on the Slide Master. You also make global changes when you modify your presentation's theme colors or background.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Links
In this lesson, we'll work with hyperlinks and action buttons. You'll enliven your presentation as you learn to create links from text or objects to other slides, presentations, documents, and Web pages. You can even add sounds and 3-D effects if you want!

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Applying Animation to Slides
Have you seen a presentation where text, images, or entire slides fly in from the top or push up from the bottom? That's animation. In this lesson, you'll learn about slide transitions, and you'll apply animation to individual slides and the Slide Master. You'll also find out how to add sound effects, such as chimes and whooshes. And perhaps most important, you'll learn how to avoid overdoing these effects!

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Applying Advanced Animation Effects
You already know how to apply animation to your slides as they transition. Now it's time to apply advanced animation effects to text and objects on individual slides and Slide Masters. With the animation commands and the Animation Pane, you'll add and reorder animated text and objects on slides. You'll also add sound clips to your presentation.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Sharing and Saving Your Presentations
Now that you know so much about creating PowerPoint presentations, we'll focus on different ways to save and share them. You'll see how easy it is to make your presentation into a PDF file, so it'll be accessible on computers that don't have PowerPoint 2010. You'll learn to open, edit, and share your presentation online with a Windows Live account. And you'll turn your presentation into a video.
Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, or XP with Service Pack 3; Microsoft PowerPoint 2010 or Microsoft Office Professional 2010 (please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins.) A free 60-day trial version of Office 2010 may be available at http://www2.buyoffice.microsoft.com/usa/?torb=4&WT.mc_id=ODC_ENUS_GenTry_Control.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users, nor for users of any older versions of Microsoft PowerPoint.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2013

Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Take your PowerPoint presentations from ordinary to extraordinary! In these lessons, you'll learn how to use Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 or PowerPoint 365 to create professional-quality slide presentations that grab and hold your audience's attention from start to finish.  

You'll see how to plan a presentation for your audience, format it with themes and color, and use slide and layout masters to make global changes. You'll embellish your slides with text and objects, including pictures, shapes, WordArt, and SmartArt, and learn to add multimedia effects to create animated presentations. 

And that's just the start! With this PowerPoint training, you'll explore the options on the PowerPoint Ribbon, including the new Online Pictures command, File menu options, and Backstage View, and you'll learn how to print slides, handouts, and even an outline. And you'll discover the best view for creating and editing your slides and running your presentations.  

You'll have fun creating a PowerPoint photo album with your digital pictures, and become acquainted with OneDrive and PowerPoint Online to save, edit, and share your presentations online. Finally, you'll add versatility to your PowerPoint skills as you learn how to use the new Share and Export commands to save presentations as PDF files, videos, and more. If you want to become a PowerPoint pro, this is the course for you!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

The PowerPoint 2013 Interface
Come explore the basic features of Microsoft PowerPoint 2013! You'll learn about the Ribbon, which replaces the menu and toolbars so common in other programs written for the Windows operating system. You'll find out how to plan a presentation and start the PowerPoint program. And you'll practice working with different views, task panes, tabs, and templates.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating Presentations
Now that you know the basics of PowerPoint, it's time to create a presentation from scratch. We'll start by choosing a theme for the presentation and create slides with a variety of slide layouts. You'll find out about the Live Preview feature, and we'll discuss how to save a file so you can find it later. You'll also create and edit slides in the slide pane and in Outline view. Finally, we'll go over the ways to put on a slide show. Important stuff in Lesson 2!

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating and Editing Tables and Opening and Saving Files
Including tables in your presentation lets you present a lot of information in a little space. So in this lesson, you'll add, revise, and format tables. I'll also show you multiple ways to open a presentation. Then, I'll teach you how to preserve different versions of your work by saving with different filenames.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating and Printing Error-free Presentations
Today we'll cover two topics: printing and proofreading. You'll learn to print your presentation as slides, handouts, an outline, and notes pages. This versatility will really help you connect with audience members! And to make sure your printed presentation is as close to perfect as it can be, we'll explore the Spelling, AutoCorrect, Research, and Thesaurus features.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Clips and Images
We're going to switch gears in this lesson and work with images instead of text, which I think you'll enjoy. I'll show you how to embellish your slides with media clips, which could include illustrations, clip art, and photographs. You'll even learn how to download an image from a website and insert the image on a slide.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

WordArt, Shapes, and SmartArt
You're going to work with WordArt, Shapes, and SmartArt Graphics in this lesson, which I think you'll find exciting. It's fun to transform text into colorful WordArt objects and to draw and fill shapes with color and special effects. You'll learn to group and edit the objects you create. And you'll add visual sophistication to your text with SmartArt Graphics.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Creating and Editing a Chart
In this lesson, you'll create and edit a chart slide to illustrate statistical data. You'll find this lesson easy if you like working with numbers! But if you don't enjoy math, that's okay—I'll walk you through everything you need to know and do to create a chart slide. I'll also show you how to change the look of your chart by using the options on the Chart Tools contextual tab and the chart formatting buttons.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Making Global Changes to a Presentation
Making the same changes to dozens of PowerPoint slides is boring and time-consuming. Today we'll look at global changes you can make to your slides, handouts, and notes. For example, if you want to increase or decrease the font size on all the slides in a presentation, just make the change on the slide master. You also make global changes when you modify your presentation's theme colors or background.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Links
In this lesson, we'll work with hyperlinks and action buttons. You'll enliven your presentation as you learn to create links from text or objects to other slides, presentations, documents, and Web pages. You can even add sounds and 3-D effects if you want!

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Applying Animation to Slides
Have you seen a presentation where text, images, or entire slides fly in from the top or push up from the bottom? That's animation. In this lesson, you'll learn about slide transitions, the options on the Transition tab, and you'll apply animation to text and objects on slides and the slide or layout master with the options on the Animations tab. You'll also find out how to add sound effects, such as chimes and whooshes, to slide transitions. And perhaps most important, you'll learn how to avoid overdoing these effects!

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Applying Advanced Animation Effects to Text and Objects
You already know how to apply animation to your slides as they transition. Now it's time to apply advanced animation effects to text and objects on slides and slide and layout masters. With the animation commands and the Animation Pane, you'll add and reorder animated text and objects on slides. You'll also add an audio clip to your presentation.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Sharing and Saving Your Presentations, Including OneDrive and Office Online
Now that you know so much about creating PowerPoint presentations, we'll focus on different ways to save and share them. You'll see how easy it is to make your presentation into a PDF file, so it'll be accessible on computers that don't have PowerPoint 2013. You'll learn to open, edit, and share your presentation online with a Windows OneDrive account and PowerPoint Online. And you'll turn your presentation into a video.

Microsoft PowerPoint 2013, Microsoft Office Home and Student 2013 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows Server 2012.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users, or for users of any older versions of Microsoft PowerPoint.

 

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2016

Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Take your PowerPoint presentations from ordinary to extraordinary! In these lessons, you'll learn how to use Microsoft PowerPoint 2016 (now available through Office 365) to create professional-quality slide presentations that grab and hold your audience's attention from start to finish.

You'll start by learning how to plan and create dazzling slide presentations using a variety of slide and layout masters that make global changes to your presentation in a snap. You'll also see how to embellish your slides with pictures, shapes, WordArt, and SmartArt, as well as multimedia effects such as animations, slide transitions, audio, video, and text and object hyperlinks.

And that's just the start! You'll explore the options on the PowerPoint Ribbon, including the new Tell Me feature (an enhanced Help feature) and Smart Lookup, which allows you to look up definitions of a word or phrase. You'll explore the File menu options and Backstage View, and learn how to print slides, handouts, and even an outline. And you'll discover the best view for creating and editing your slides and running your presentations, including how to use Reading View to proof your work. 

You'll have fun creating a PowerPoint photo album with your digital pictures, and become acquainted with OneDrive and PowerPoint Online to save, edit, and share your presentations online. Finally, you'll add versatility to your PowerPoint skills as you learn how to use the Share and Export commands to save presentations as PDF files, videos, and more.

Whether you're a beginner or an experienced user, these lessons will teach you how to turn simple slides into a polished and exciting presentation that will make your message memorable. If you want to take your PowerPoint skills to a higher level, this is the course for you!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

The PowerPoint 2016 Interface
Come explore the basic features of Microsoft PowerPoint 2016! You'll learn about the Ribbon, which replaces the menu and toolbars so common in other programs written for the Windows operating system. You'll find out how to plan a presentation and start the PowerPoint program. And you'll practice working with different views, task panes, tabs, and templates.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating Presentations
Now that you know the basics of PowerPoint, it's time to create a presentation from scratch. We'll start by choosing a theme for the presentation and create slides with a variety of slide layouts. You'll find out about the Live Preview feature, and we'll discuss how to save a file so you can find it later. You'll also create and edit slides in the slide pane and in Outline view. Finally, we'll go over the ways to put on a slide show. Important stuff in Lesson 2!

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating and Editing Tables and Opening and Saving Files
Including tables in your presentation lets you present a lot of information in a little space. So in this lesson, you'll add, revise, and format tables. I'll also show you multiple ways to open a presentation. Then, I'll teach you how to preserve different versions of your work by saving with different filenames.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating and Printing Error-free Presentations
Today we'll cover two topics: printing and proofreading. You'll learn to print your presentation as slides, handouts, an outline, and notes pages. This versatility will really help you connect with audience members! And to make sure your printed presentation is as close to perfect as it can be, we'll explore the Spelling, AutoCorrect, and Thesaurus features, along with the new Smart Lookup feature.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Saved and Online Images
We're going to switch gears in this lesson and work with images instead of text, which I think you'll enjoy. I'll show you how to embellish your slides with media clips, which could include illustrations, clip art, and photographs. You'll even learn how to download an image from a website and insert the image on a slide.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

WordArt, Shapes, and SmartArt
You're going to work with WordArt, Shapes, and SmartArt Graphics in this lesson, which I think you'll find exciting. It's fun to transform text into colorful WordArt objects and to draw and fill shapes with color and special effects. You'll learn to group and edit the objects you create. And you'll add visual sophistication to your text with SmartArt Graphics.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Creating and Editing a Chart
In this lesson, you'll create and edit a chart slide to illustrate statistical data. You'll find this lesson easy if you like working with numbers! But if you don't enjoy math, that's okay—I'll walk you through everything you need to know and do to create a chart slide. I'll also show you how to change the look of your chart by using the options on the Chart Tools contextual tab and the chart formatting buttons.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Making Global Changes to a Presentation
Making the same changes to dozens of PowerPoint slides is boring and time-consuming. Today we'll look at global changes you can make to your slides, handouts, and notes. For example, if you want to increase or decrease the font size on all the slides in a presentation, just make the change on the slide master. You'll also make global changes when you modify your presentation's theme colors or background.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Links
In this lesson, we'll work with hyperlinks and action buttons. You'll enliven your presentation as you learn to create links from text or objects to other slides, presentations, documents, and Web pages. You can even add sounds and 3-D effects if you want!

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Applying Animation to Slides, Text, and Objects
Have you seen a presentation where text, images, or entire slides fly in from the top or push up from the bottom? That's animation. In this lesson, you'll learn about slide transitions, the options on the Transition tab, and you'll apply animation to text and objects on slides and the slide or layout master with the options on the Animations tab. You'll also find out how to add sound effects, such as chimes and whooshes, to slide transitions. And perhaps most important, you'll learn how to avoid overdoing these effects!

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Applying Advanced Animation Effects to Text and Objects
You already know how to apply animation to your slides as they transition. Now it's time to apply advanced animation effects to text and objects on slides and slide and layout masters. With the animation commands and the Animation Pane, you'll add and reorder animated text and objects on slides. You'll also add an audio clip to your presentation.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Sharing and Saving Your Presentations, Including OneDrive and Office Online
Now that you know so much about creating PowerPoint presentations, we'll focus on different ways to save and share them. You'll see how easy it is to make your presentation into a PDF file, so it'll be accessible on computers that don't have PowerPoint 2016. You'll learn to open, edit, and share your presentation online with a Windows OneDrive account and PowerPoint Online. And you'll turn your presentation into a video.

Microsoft Office Home and Student 2016, or a subscription to Office 365 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7 Service Pack 1, Windows 10 Server, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2012, or Windows Server 2008 R.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users or for users of any older versions of Microsoft PowerPoint. There is a PowerPoint 2016 version for Macintosh users, but this class is for Windows users.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2019/Office 365

Introduction to Microsoft PowerPoint 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

This in-depth course introduces PowerPoint’s functions and teaches you how to plan and create professional-quality presentations. You will learn how to catch your audience’s attention with PowerPoint’s visual features like photo album. As you become acquainted to Office 365, you will learn how to utilize OneDrive and PowerPoint Online’s cross-functionality — saving, editing, and sharing your presentations online. 

This course is perfect for beginners looking to learn how to use the latest PowerPoint software. You will have the opportunity to create a custom presentation with content specific to your needs. By completion, you will be able to create captivating presentations and contribute to your company’s business processes.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

The PowerPoint 2019 Interface
Lesson 1 explores the basic features of Microsoft PowerPoint 2019. You'll explore the Ribbon and learn how to start the PowerPoint program and plan a presentation. And you'll practice working with different views, task panes, tabs, and templates.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating Presentations
Now that you know the basics of PowerPoint, it's time to create a presentation from scratch. We'll start by choosing a theme for a presentation and create slides with a variety of slide layouts. You'll explore the Live Preview feature, and we'll discuss how to save a file for future use. You'll also create and edit slides in Slide pane and Outline view. Finally, we'll explore ways to play a slide show.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Working with Files and Creating and Editing Tables
Including tables in your presentation lets you present a lot of information in a compact space. In this lesson you'll add, revise and format tables. You’ll also explore multiple ways to open a presentation. Then, you’ll learn how to preserve different versions of your work by saving with new file names.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Creating Professional Presentations
Lesson 4 covers two topics: proofreading and printing. We’ll explore the Spelling, Auto-correct, Thesaurus and Smart Lookup feature. You'll learn to print your presentation as slides, an outline, handouts and notes pages. This versatility really helps you connect with audience members!

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working with the Images Group
This lesson switches gears and works with images instead of text. You’ll learn how to embellish your slides with media images, including online pictures, Icons, 3D models and photographs. You'll also learn how to download an image from a website and insert the image on a slide.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

WordArt and the Illustrations Group
Lesson 6 includes instructions for using WordArt, Shapes, Icons, 3D Models and SmartArt Graphics. You’ll learn how to transform text into colorful WordArt objects and add Icons and 3D Models. You’ll also practice drawing and filling shapes with color and special effects. You'll learn to group and edit the objects you create. And you'll add visual sophistication to your text with SmartArt Graphics.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

All About Charts
In this lesson, you'll create a chart to illustrate statistical data. You’ll explore chart components and learn how to add and edit specific chart elements. You’ll discover how to change the look of your chart by using options on the Chart Tools contextual tab and the chart formatting buttons.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Making Global Changes to a Presentation
Making duplicate changes to dozens of PowerPoint slides is boring and time-consuming. This lesson focuses on making global changes to slides, handouts, and notes. You'll also make global changes to modify your presentation's background or theme colors.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Links
In this lesson, we'll work with hyperlinks and action buttons. Enliven your presentation as you create links from text or objects to other slides, presentations, documents, and Web pages. You can add sounds and 3-D effects if desired. Also introduced in Lesson 9 is the Zoom feature which sets up presenter-driven links between slides in a presentation.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Applying Animation to Slides, Text, and Objects
Lesson 10 explores slide transitions and the Transition tab options. You'll apply animation to text and slide objects and use the Animations tab to add animation to slide or layout masters. You'll also find out how to add sound effects, such as chime or coin, to slide transitions.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Adding Advanced Animation Effects to Text and Objects
Using the Animation Pane, you'll add and reorder animated text and objects on slides. You’ll discover how to apply advanced animation effects to text and objects on slides, and slide and layout masters. You'll also add an audio clip to your presentation.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Sharing and Saving Your Presentations
In Lesson 12, we'll focus on different ways to save and share a presentation. You'll practice converting a presentation into a PDF file, so it’s accessible on computers without PowerPoint 2019. You'll learn to open, edit, and share your presentation online with PowerPoint Online and a Windows OneDrive account. Last, you'll learn how to transform your presentation into a video.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. A Mac OS is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • Windows 10 operating systems. PowerPoint 2019 is not compatible with earlier Windows versions.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft PowerPoint, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

There are no prerequisites to take this course.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Project 2010

Introduction to Microsoft Project 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Discover how to effectively plan, implement, and control projects using Microsoft Project 2010. In these lessons, you'll learn how to use Microsoft Project to think through and organize your project's details, plan a schedule, sequence tasks, produce a baseline, assign resources and costs, track your progress, identify and analyze variances, and revise your project plan. 

Once you've constructed a basic schedule, you'll see how to enlarge it and share it with clients and co-workers. In addition, you'll learn Microsoft Project's techniques for fine-tuning different aspects of your project, including splitting tasks for work interruptions and defining material consumption rates. 

The knowledge you gain from this course will help you avoid going down dead-end alleys and prevent you from overloading your schedule. If you encounter trouble on your project, you'll be able to apply a number of powerful problem resolution techniques to help get your project back on track.

No matter how complex your projects are, Microsoft Project will help you cut them down to size. By the end of the course, you'll be able to produce project plans that wow your audience and empower you to achieve your business goals.

 

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Overview of Microsoft Project

Microsoft Project can help you manage your project's schedule, costs, and scope in a way that you've never dreamed of. Too often, Project users never use this powerful tool to its fullest potential. In your first lesson, you’ll discover how to improve your project by adopting a formal management approach. You’ll get a quick overview of Project Management, and then you’ll learn the basics of Microsoft Project, including a summary of the Gantt Chart view and ways to create and enter project tasks. 

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Solid Foundation
If you're looking for ways to keep organized, you'll see just how to do that in today's lesson! We'll walk through steps to create a project schedule in no time flat. Once you create and enter tasks in Project's Gantt Chart view, you’ll set a schedule by using a calendar and assigning lead times. Then, you’ll need to create task dependencies, sometimes known as links. You'll see how to perform these activities and, in the process, you’ll become comfortable using Project's many dialog boxes. Before you know it, you'll be creating schedules for all your projects with little effort.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating and Managing Resources
You won't get too far with your project without adding resources. While tasks create the backbone of your project, people, equipment, and material bring your project to life. In this lesson, you’ll find out how to apply two types of Project resources—work resources, and material resources. We'll look at two more dialog boxes—Resource Information and Assign Resources—and you'll learn how to analyze resources by using the Resource Sheet and Resource Usage views. 

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Defining and Assigning Costs
No matter what project you work on, the bottom line is always important. So get ready to add the final piece to your basic project schedule—costs. We'll start things off by looking through a brief overview of cost accounting, exploring fixed, variable, relevant, and accrued costs. After this review, you'll learn how to assign costs by using the Resource Sheet. You'll even discover how to assign different costs for the same resource and analyze the overall costs for your project by using the Cost Table.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Project Templates, Security, and Constraints
Successful project managers are known for their efficiency and for safeguarding private information. Microsoft Project provides two excellent methods to help you in these areas: project templates and project security. You’ll find out how to use some of the many templates Project has to offer, including the Residential Construction template and the New Product template. You'll also learn how to protect your project information with backups, passwords, and write protection. Then you’ll discover how to put Project’s task constraints to good use.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Working With Views and Managing Information
In this lesson, you’ll discover how easy it is to modify your basic schedules and work with project data. You'll look at the various Project views, such as the Calendar, Leveling Gantt, and the Network Diagram. And if you don't like the default colors or fonts in your schedule or table, you'll be well-prepared to make changes. You'll even learn how and why you might want to create a combination view; add notes to your project; or sort, filter, and group data. 

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Fine-Tuning Your Project Plan
Many projects experience schedule compression when management or clients ask that the project be completed sooner and for less. In today's lesson, you’ll discover how to improve your schedule's performance. You’ll explore the Project Statistics dialog box, and you’ll learn how to determine the ideal starting point in terms of planned costs and completion dates. You'll see how to change task dependencies to speed up your project, and also find out how to split tasks to add more lead time. You'll also learn how to create recurring tasks and attaché notes to your project’s task bars.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Baselines and Tracking
Before you implement your project, you need to create a baseline. This will help you track actual results against what you originally set out to accomplish. Microsoft Project makes it possible to set up a baseline with a few mouse clicks. You'll learn how to create a baseline and then see a variety of ways, including using the Tracking toolbar, to record your actual project results.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Managing Variances
Here's where things really start to come together! You'll learn how to compare actual results to your baseline by using the Gantt Chart and reviewing a table. You'll discover how useful status identifiers and progress lines can be to quickly gain information about your project's position. You’ll also begin using the Tracking Gantt and filters to automatically identify slipping tasks. You'll also take a stroll through the basics of variance analysis by discussing the Start and Finish Date, Resources, and Work Variance Tables.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Using and Creating Reports

Once your project gets rolling, outsiders will probably want to know how things are going. It can be a real time drain answering each request individually. When others request information from you, Microsoft Project offers the perfect solution: Reports. We'll go over 20 standard reports in five different categories in today's lesson. By the time you finish, you'll be well acquainted with Project’s reporting capabilities, and also, know how to create Visual Reports as Project automatically exports data to Microsoft Excel and Visio. 

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Printing Views
Now that you're using reports to share project information, you'll occasionally need to print out various views and tables. In this lesson, you’ll delve into printing Microsoft Project documents. You'll be a master at creating different views of your project with the Page Setup dialog box, and you'll clearly understand the mechanics of the Print dialog box and the Print Preview.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Closing Your Project
No project is complete until it's officially closed. In this final lesson, you'll find out how to close your project and use the Organizer to help you customize and copy views for future projects.
Microsoft Project Standard 2010 is required (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 7, or Windows 8. Note: this course is not suitable for Macintosh users.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Project 2013

Introduction to Microsoft Project 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Discover how to effectively plan, implement, and control projects using the world's most popular project management software, Microsoft Project 2013.   From sequencing tasks, producing a baseline, and assigning resources and costs, to tracking progress, analyzing variances, and revising your project plan, Microsoft Project can help you organize all your project's details quickly and effectively.  

In this course, you'll master the basics of Microsoft Project 2013 so you can create a project schedule in no time flat and then share it with clients and co-workers. Using the program's different views, such as the Calendar and Gantt chart views, you'll be able to manage your project information and produce effective reports.  Armed with this information, you'll avoid going down dead-end alleys and overloading your schedule.  And should you encounter trouble, you'll master a number of tried-and-true problem-resolution techniques to help get your project back on track.

You'll also learn how to fine-tune different aspects of your project, including splitting tasks for work interruptions and defining material consumption rates.  After completing the course, you'll know how to develop, implement, and control a project plan that meets organizational and customer objectives.

 


Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Overview of Microsoft Project
Microsoft Project can help you manage your project's schedule, costs, and scope in a way that you've never dreamed of. Too often, Project users never use this powerful tool to its fullest potential. In your first lesson, you'll discover how to improve your project by adopting a formal management approach. You'll get a quick overview of Project Management, and then you'll learn the basics of Microsoft Project, including a summary of the Gantt Chart view and ways to create and enter project tasks.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Solid Foundation
If you're looking for ways to keep organized, you'll see just how to do that in today's lesson! We'll walk through steps to create a project schedule in no time flat. Once you create and enter tasks in Project's Gantt Chart view, you'll set a schedule by using a calendar and assigning lead times. Then, you'll need to create task dependencies, sometimes known as links. You'll see how to perform these activities and, in the process, you'll become comfortable using Project's many dialog boxes. Before you know it, you'll be creating schedules for all your projects with little effort.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating and Managing Resources

You won't get too far with your project without adding resources. While tasks create the backbone of your project, people, equipment, and material bring your project to life. In this lesson, you'll find out how to apply two types of Project resources—work resources, and material resources. We'll look at two more dialog boxes—Resource Information and Assign Resources—and you'll learn how to analyze resources by using the Resource Sheet and Resource Usage views.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Defining and Assigning Costs

No matter what project you work on, the bottom line is always important. So get ready to add the final piece to your basic project schedule—costs. We'll start things off by looking through a brief overview of cost accounting, exploring fixed, variable, relevant, and accrued costs. After this review, you'll learn how to assign costs by using the Resource Sheet. You'll even discover how to assign different costs for the same resource and analyze the overall costs for your project by using the Cost Table.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Project Templates, Security, and Constraints
Successful project managers are known for their efficiency and for safeguarding private information. Microsoft Project provides two excellent methods to help you in these areas: project templates and project security. You'll find out how to use some of the many templates Project has to offer, including the Residential Construction template and the New Product template. You'll also learn how to protect your project information with backups, passwords, and write protection. Then you'll discover how to put Project's task constraints to good use.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Working With Views and Managing Information
In this lesson, you'll discover how easy it is to modify your basic schedules and work with project data. You'll look at the various Project views, such as the Calendar, Leveling Gantt, and the Network Diagram. And if you don't like the default colors or fonts in your schedule or table, you'll be well-prepared to make changes. You'll even learn how and why you might want to create a combination view; add notes to your project; or sort, filter, and group data.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Fine-Tuning Your Project Plan
Many projects experience schedule compression when management or clients ask that the project be completed sooner and for less. In today's lesson, you'll discover how to improve your schedule's performance. You'll explore the Project Statistics dialog box, and you'll learn how to determine the ideal starting point in terms of planned costs and completion dates. You'll see how to change task dependencies to speed up your project and also find out how to split tasks to add more lead time. You'll also learn how to create recurring tasks and attach notes to your project's taskbars.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Baselines and Tracking
Before you implement your project, you need to create a baseline. This will help you track actual results against what you originally set out to accomplish. Microsoft Project makes it possible to set up a baseline with a few mouse clicks. You'll learn how to create a baseline and then see a variety of ways, including using the Tracking toolbar, to record your actual project results.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Managing Variances
Here's where things really start to come together! You'll learn how to compare actual results to your baseline by using the Gantt Chart and reviewing a table. You'll discover how useful status identifiers and progress lines can be to quickly gain information about your project's position. You'll also begin using the Tracking Gantt and filters to automatically identify slipping tasks. You'll also take a stroll through the basics of variance analysis by discussing the Start and Finish Date, Resources, and Work Variance Tables.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Using and Creating Reports
Once your project gets rolling, outsiders will probably want to know how things are going. It can be a real time drain answering each request individually. When others request information from you, Microsoft Project offers the perfect solution: Reports. We'll go over a representative sample of the standard reports as well as discuss how to modify and create new reports in today's lesson. By the time you finish, you'll be well acquainted with Project's reporting capabilities and also know how to create Visual Reports as Project automatically exports data to Microsoft Excel and Visio.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Printing Views
Now that you're using reports to share project information, you'll occasionally need to print various views and tables. In this lesson, you'll delve into printing Microsoft Project documents. You'll be a master at creating different views of your project with the Page Setup dialog box, and you'll clearly understand the mechanics of the Print dialog box and the Print Preview.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Closing Your Project
No project is complete until it's officially closed. In this final lesson, you'll find out how to close your project and use the Organizer to help you customize and copy views for future projects.

Microsoft Project Software 2013 1 PC/1 User Download is required (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows XP, Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.


Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Project 2016

Introduction to Microsoft Project 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Discover how to effectively plan, implement, and control projects using Microsoft Project 2016. From sequencing tasks, producing a baseline, and assigning resources and costs, to tracking progress, analyzing variances, and revising your project plan, Microsoft Project can help you organize all your project's details quickly and effectively.  

In this course, you'll master the basics of Microsoft Project 2016 so you can create a project schedule in no time flat and then share it with clients and co-workers. Using the program's different views, such as the Calendar and Gantt Chart views, you'll manage your project information and produce effective reports.  Armed with this information, you'll avoid going down dead-end alleys and overloading your schedule.  And should you encounter trouble, you'll master a number of tried-and-true problem-resolution techniques to help get your project back on track.

You'll also learn how to fine-tune different aspects of your project, including splitting tasks for work interruptions and defining material consumption rates.  After completing the course, you'll know how to develop, implement, and control a project plan that meets organizational and customer objectives.


Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Overview of Microsoft Project
Microsoft Project can help you manage your project's schedule, costs, and scope in a way that you've never dreamed of. Too often, Project users never use this powerful tool to its fullest potential. In your first lesson, you'll discover how to improve your project by adopting a formal management approach. You'll get a quick overview of Project Management, and then you'll learn the basics of Microsoft Project, including a summary of the Gantt Chart view and ways to create and enter project tasks.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Solid Foundation
If you're looking for ways to keep organized, you'll see just how to do that in today's lesson! We'll walk through steps to create a project schedule in no time flat. Once you create and enter tasks in Project's Gantt Chart view, you'll set a schedule by using a calendar and assigning lead times. Then, you'll need to create task dependencies, sometimes known as links. You'll see how to perform these activities and, in the process, you'll become comfortable using Project's many dialog boxes. Before you know it, you'll be creating schedules for all your projects with little effort.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating and Managing Resources
You won't get too far with your project without adding resources. While tasks create the backbone of your project, people, equipment, and material bring your project to life. In this lesson, you'll find out how to apply two types of Project resources—work resources, and material resources. We'll look at two more dialog boxes—Resource Information and Assign Resources—and you'll learn how to analyze resources by using the Resource Sheet and Resource Usage views.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Defining and Assigning Costs
No matter what project you work on, the bottom line is always important. So get ready to add the final piece to your basic project schedule—costs. We'll start things off by looking through a brief overview of cost accounting, exploring fixed, variable, relevant, and accrued costs. After this review, you'll learn how to assign costs by using the Resource Sheet. You'll even discover how to assign different costs for the same resource and analyze the overall costs for your project by using the Cost Table.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Project Templates, Security, and Constraints
Successful project managers are known for their efficiency and for safeguarding private information. Microsoft Project provides two excellent methods to help you in these areas: project templates and project security. You'll find out how to use some of the many templates Project has to offer, including the Residential Construction template and the New Product template. You'll also learn how to protect your project information with backups, passwords, and write protection. Then you'll discover how to put Project's task constraints to good use.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Working With Views and Managing Information
In this lesson, you'll discover how easy it is to modify your basic schedules and work with project data. You'll look at the various Project views, such as the Calendar, Leveling Gantt, and the Network Diagram. And if you don't like the default colors or fonts in your schedule or table, you'll be well-prepared to make changes. You'll even learn how and why you might want to create a combination view; add notes to your project; or sort, filter, and group data.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Fine-Tuning Your Project Plan
Many projects experience schedule compression when management or clients ask that the project be completed sooner and for less. In today's lesson, you'll discover how to improve your schedule's performance. You'll explore the Project Statistics dialog box, and you'll learn how to determine the ideal starting point in terms of planned costs and completion dates. You'll see how to change task dependencies to speed up your project and also find out how to split tasks to add more lead time. You'll also learn how to create recurring tasks and attach notes to your project's taskbars.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Baselines and Tracking
Before you implement your project, you need to create a baseline. This will help you track actual results against what you originally set out to accomplish. Microsoft Project makes it possible to set up a baseline with a few mouse clicks. You'll learn how to create a baseline and then see a variety of ways, including using the Tracking toolbar, to record your actual project results.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Managing Variances
Here's where things really start to come together! You'll learn how to compare actual results to your baseline by using the Gantt Chart and reviewing a table. You'll discover how useful status identifiers and progress lines can be to quickly gain information about your project's position. You'll also begin using the Tracking Gantt and filters to automatically identify slipping tasks. You'll also take a stroll through the basics of variance analysis by discussing the Start and Finish Date, Resources, and Work Variance Tables.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Using and Creating Reports
Once your project gets rolling, outsiders will probably want to know how things are going. It can be a real time drain answering each request individually. When others request information from you, Microsoft Project offers the perfect solution: Reports. We'll go over a representative sample of the standard reports as well as discuss how to modify and create new reports in today's lesson. By the time you finish, you'll be well acquainted with Project's reporting capabilities and also know how to create Visual Reports as Project automatically exports data to Microsoft Excel and Visio.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Printing Views
Now that you're using reports to share project information, you'll occasionally need to print various views and tables. In this lesson, you'll delve into printing Microsoft Project documents. You'll be a master at creating different views of your project with the Page Setup dialog box, and you'll clearly understand the mechanics of the Print dialog box and the Print Preview.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Closing Your Project
No project is complete until it's officially closed. In this final lesson, you'll find out how to close your project and use the Organizer to help you customize and copy views for future projects.

Microsoft Project 2016 is required (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Microsoft Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, or 10.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Project 2019/Office 365

Introduction to Microsoft Project 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Microsoft Project is a staple for project management and remains the most widely-used project management software across all industries. If you manage projects in your organization, learning how to use this longstanding resource is key to successfully and effectively seeing your projects through to completion. 

In this course, you will discover how to effectively plan, implement, and control projects using Microsoft Project 2019. From sequencing tasks, producing a baseline, and assigning resources and costs, to tracking progress and revising your project plan, Microsoft Project can help you organize all your project's details. 

Armed with this information, you will avoid stalling or overloading your schedule. If you encounter trouble, you will know how to best utilize Project 2019 to get your project back on track.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Overview of Microsoft Project
Microsoft Project can help you manage your project's schedule, costs, and scope in a way that you've never dreamed of. Too often, Project users never use this powerful tool to its fullest potential. In your first lesson, you'll discover how to improve your project by adopting a formal management approach. You'll get a quick overview of Project Management, and then you'll learn the basics of Microsoft Project, including a summary of the Gantt Chart view and ways to create and enter project tasks.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Creating a Solid Foundation
If you're looking for ways to keep organized, you'll see just how to do that in today's lesson! We'll walk through steps to create a project schedule in no time flat. Once you create and enter tasks in Project's Gantt Chart view, you'll set a schedule by using a calendar and assigning lead times. Then, you'll need to create task dependencies, sometimes known as links. You'll see how to perform these activities, and in the process, you'll become comfortable using Project's many dialog boxes. Before you know it, you'll be creating schedules for all your projects with little effort.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Creating and Managing Resources
You won't get too far with your project without adding resources. While tasks create the backbone of your project, people, equipment, and material bring your project to life. In this lesson, you'll find out how to apply two types of Project resources—work resources, and material resources. We'll look at two more dialog boxes—Resource Information and Assign Resources—and you'll learn how to analyze resources by using the Resource Sheet and Resource Usage views.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Defining and Assigning Costs
No matter what project you work on, the bottom line is always important. So, get ready to add the final piece to your basic project schedule—costs. You'll start things off by looking through a brief overview of cost accounting, exploring fixed, variable, relevant, and accrued costs. After this review, you'll learn how to assign costs by using the Resource Sheet. You'll even discover how to assign different costs for the same resource and analyze the overall costs for your project by using the Cost Table.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Project Templates, Security, and Constraints
Successful project managers are known for their efficiency and for safeguarding private information. Microsoft Project provides two excellent methods to help you in these areas: project templates and project security. You'll find out how to use some of the many templates Project has to offer, including the Residential Construction template and the New Product template. You'll also learn how to protect your project information with backups, passwords, and write protection. Then you'll discover how to put Project's task constraints to good use.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Working With Views and Managing Information
In this lesson, you'll discover how easy it is to modify your basic schedules and work with project data. You'll look at the various Project views, such as the Calendar, Leveling Gantt, and the Network Diagram. And if you don't like the default colors or fonts in your schedule or table, you'll be well-prepared to make changes. You'll even learn how and why you might want to create a combination view; add notes to your project; or sort, filter, and group data.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Fine-Tuning Your Project Plan
Many projects experience schedule compression when management or clients ask that the project be completed sooner and for less. In today's lesson, you'll discover how to improve your schedule's performance. You'll explore the Project Statistics dialog box, and you'll learn how to determine the ideal starting point in terms of planned costs and completion dates. You'll see how to change task dependencies to speed up your project and also find out how to split tasks to add more lead time. You'll also learn how to create recurring tasks and attach notes to your project's taskbars.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Baselines and Tracking
Before you implement your project, you need to create a baseline. This will help you track actual results against what you originally set out to accomplish. Microsoft Project makes it possible to set up a baseline with a few mouse clicks. You'll learn how to create a baseline and then see a variety of ways, including using the Tracking toolbar, to record your actual project results.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Managing Variances
Here's where things really start to come together! You'll learn how to compare actual results to your baseline by using the Gantt Chart and reviewing a table. You'll discover how useful status identifiers and progress lines can be to gain information about your project's position quickly. You'll also begin using the Tracking Gantt and filters to identify slipping tasks automatically. You'll also take a stroll through the basics of variance analysis by discussing the Start and Finish Date, Resources, and Work Variance Tables.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Closing Your Project
No project is complete until it's officially closed. In this final lesson, you'll find out how to close your project and use the Organizer to help you customize and copy views for future projects.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Printing Views
Now that you're using reports to share project information, you'll occasionally need to print various views and tables. In this lesson, you'll delve into printing Microsoft Project documents. You'll be a master at creating different views of your project with the Page Setup dialog box, and you'll clearly understand the mechanics of the Print dialog box and the Print Preview.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Using and Creating Reports
Once your project gets rolling, outsiders will probably want to know how things are going. It can be a real time drain answering each request individually. When others request information from you, Microsoft Project offers the perfect solution: Reports. You'll go over a representative sample of the standard reports as well as discuss how to modify and create new reports in today's lesson. By the time you finish, you'll be well acquainted with Project's reporting capabilities and also know how to develop Visual Reports as Project automatically exports data to Microsoft Excel and Visio.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. A Mac OS is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Excel, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

There are no prerequisites to take this course.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Publisher 2010

Introduction to Microsoft Publisher 2010

$190 + applicable tax

In this course, you'll learn to use Microsoft Publisher 2010 to create impressive publications. It's perfect for beginners who want to learn how to produce professional-quality newsletters, fliers, letterheads, and brochures. 

You'll start by learning how to navigate the Publisher workspace using the ribbon, and how to access both local and online Publisher templates. Next, you'll find out how to create and manage text, pictures, graphics, and other elements, such as tables and shapes, and see how you can use these different components to create a variety of documents. 

As the course progresses, you'll learn about different kinds of publications Publisher can help you produce. You'll see how to create documents from scratch, but you'll also learn how to modify existing templates so you can create customized documents more easily. Finally, you'll learn all about printing your publications and how to share Publisher documents electronically. 

Once you learn how to manage Publisher tools and features and how to design effective publications, you'll be able to create anything you might need.  Introduction to Publisher 2010 is a course that will help you do just that!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Microsoft Publisher Basics
Welcome to Publisher 2010! In the first lesson of our class, we'll go over some basic Publisher concepts, including accessing the program and customizing some of Publisher's powerful features. Then we'll talk about how you can access and use Publisher's extensive online Help system. This is a handy tool for a beginner to know as you set off on your journey!

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

The Publisher Workspace
Today, we'll get started with some of Publisher's basics. We'll explore some more of the concepts that you need to know before delving into a large project, including how to open, save, and close a file. Then we'll take a look at the various elements of the main Publisher workspace, including ribbon options and additional menus.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Working With Text
Are you ready to have some fun? In this lesson, you'll see how to add and edit text, both directly in the program and by importing it from other documents. Then, you'll learn how to format text (including selecting the font, size, and color) and how to change paragraph alignment and line spacing. We'll also discuss how to set off special text by adding borders and fills to the text frame.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Working With Graphics
In today's lesson, you'll learn how to punch up the creativity in your projects by adding graphics. Well go over how to create and format drawing objects, as well as how to insert clip art and import picture files. Once you have the basics down, we'll dive into recoloring, resizing, cropping, rotating, and flipping graphics, tweaking them for just the right impact.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Tables
It's time for you to discover how to create and work with tables in Publisher. You'll also learn how to apply and customize table borders; add shading, colors, and patterns; and merge and split cells.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Newsletter Design, Part I
Today, we'll begin our two-lesson series on how to create an impressive professional newsletter in Publisher. We'll begin by going over some basic planning issues (the crucial first steps!), and then we'll continue with some layout tips. By the end of this lesson, you'll select or create a color scheme, develop a masthead, flow text onto a page, and then continue that text onto another page.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Newsletter Design, Part II
You've done a lot with your newsletter already! Now, you'll wrap things up by learning how to use the Design Gallery to create a professional sidebar, format a drop cap, create a footer on the background, insert a picture, and group objects. When you finish, you'll have a snazzy newsletter to show for all your hard work.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Creating Fliers, Ads, and Business Cards
Today, we'll explore some common publications often used in business. You'll learn how to effectively design and create fliers, advertisements, and business cards. We'll also discuss local and online printing options for these publications.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Cards, Letterhead, and Certificates
In this lesson, we'll explore some common Publisher templates that are often used at home: greeting card, postcards, letterhead, and certificates. Using available Publisher templates, you'll learn how to create pubs for personal use that will get the reaction you're looking for from friends and family!

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Creating a Brochure
Publisher makes it easier (and cheaper!) than ever before for anyone to design professional-looking brochures in—literally—a matter of hours. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create a good brochure: from planning the content, to designing the cover, logo, and graphics, to placing and arranging your text.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Commercial Printing Services
Today, you'll look at the basic process for preparing your publication for a commercial printer. We'll talk about the different printing processes and when to choose each type. We'll also discuss how easy and automatic Publisher makes transferring your publication's files to a format your commercial printer can use. You'll know exactly what you'll need to do to get the results you want.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Custom Templates
Publisher offers several ways for you to create consistent and professional publications for your organization. In our last lesson together, you'll learn how to create and use Custom Templates. We'll also discuss how to access the latest templates the Publisher user community has contributed.
Microsoft Windows Vista, XP or 7, Microsoft Publisher 2010. (Please be sure to install this software on your computer before the course begins.) This course is not suitable for Macintosh users. Artistic ability is not required, just a desire to be creative.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Publisher 2013

Introduction to Microsoft Publisher 2013

$190 + applicable tax

In this course, you'll learn to use Microsoft Publisher 2013 to create impressive publications. It's perfect for beginners who want to learn how to produce professional-quality newsletters, fliers, letterheads, and brochures. 

You'll start by learning how to navigate the Publisher workspace using the ribbon, and how to access both local and online Publisher templates. Next, you'll find out how to create and manage text, pictures, graphics, and other elements, such as tables and shapes, and see how you can use these different components to create a variety of documents. 

As the course progresses, you'll learn about different kinds of publications Publisher can help you produce. You'll see how to create documents from scratch, but you'll also learn how to modify existing templates so you can create customized documents more easily. Finally, you'll learn all about printing your publications and how to share Publisher documents electronically. 

Once you learn how to manage Publisher tools and features and how to design effective publications, you'll be able to create anything you might need.  Introduction to Publisher 2013 is a course that will help you do just that!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Microsoft Publisher Basics
Welcome to Publisher 2013! In the first lesson of our class, we'll go over some basic Publisher concepts, including accessing the program and customizing some of Publisher's powerful features. Then we'll talk about how you can access and use Publisher's extensive online Help system. This is a handy tool for a beginner to know as you set off on your journey!

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

The Publisher Workspace

Today, we'll get started with some of Publisher's basics. We'll explore some more of the concepts that you need to know before delving into a large project, including how to open, save, and close a file. Then we'll take a look at the various elements of the main Publisher workspace, including ribbon options and additional menus.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Working With Text

Are you ready to have some fun? In this lesson, you'll see how to add and edit text, both directly in the program and by importing it from other documents. Then, you'll learn how to format text (including selecting the font, size, and color) and how to change paragraph alignment and line spacing. We'll also discuss how to set off special text by adding borders and fills to the text frame.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Working With Graphics
In today's lesson, you'll learn how to punch up the creativity in your projects by adding graphics. We'll go over how to create and format drawing objects, as well as how to insert clip art and import picture files. Once you have the basics down, we'll dive into recoloring, resizing, cropping, rotating, and flipping graphics, tweaking them for just the right impact.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Tables
It's time for you to discover how to create and work with tables in Publisher. You'll also learn how to apply and customize table borders; add shading, colors, and patterns; and merge and split cells.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Newsletter Design, Part I
Today, we'll begin our two-lesson series on how to create an impressive professional newsletter in Publisher. We'll begin by going over some basic planning issues (the crucial first steps!), and then we'll continue with some layout tips. By the end of this lesson, you'll select or create a color scheme, develop a masthead, flow text onto a page, and then continue that text onto another page.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Newsletter Design, Part II
You've done a lot with your newsletter already! Now, you'll wrap things up by learning how to use the Design Gallery to create a professional sidebar, format a drop cap, create a footer on the background, insert a picture, and group objects. When you finish, you'll have a snazzy newsletter to show for all your hard work.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Creating Fliers, Ads, and Business Cards
Today, we'll explore some common publications often used in business. You'll learn how to effectively design and create fliers, advertisements, and business cards. We'll also discuss local and online printing options for these publications.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Cards, Letterhead, and Certificates
In this lesson, we'll explore some common Publisher templates that are often used at home: greeting card, postcards, letterhead, and certificates. Using available Publisher templates, you'll learn how to create pubs for personal use that will get the reaction you're looking for from friends and family!

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Creating a Brochure
Publisher makes it easier (and cheaper!) than ever before for anyone to design professional-looking brochures in—literally—a matter of hours. In this lesson, you'll learn how to create a good brochure: from planning the content, to designing the cover, logo, and graphics, to placing and arranging your text.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Commercial Printing Services
Today, you'll look at the basic process for preparing your publication for a commercial printer. We'll talk about the different printing processes and when to choose each type. We'll also discuss how easy and automatic Publisher makes transferring your publication's files to a format your commercial printer can use. You'll know exactly what you'll need to do to get the results you want.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Custom Templates

Publisher offers several ways for you to create consistent and professional publications for your organization. In our last lesson together, you'll learn how to create and use Custom Templates. We'll also discuss how to access the latest templates the Publisher user community has contributed.

Microsoft Publisher 2013 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating system. Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Word 2010

Introduction to Microsoft Word 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Master the basics of the word processor PC Magazine ranked as one of the “strongest and most intelligent programs ever written.” In this hands-on workshop, you’ll learn how to add, move through, and edit text; move words from one part of your document to another; work on two or more documents simultaneously; change the size or appearance of text; change margins and tab settings; automatically center, right align, justify, and indent text; run the integrated grammar and spelling checker; use the thesaurus; and save, retrieve, copy, organize, and print your documents. By the time you’re done with the step-by-step lessons and hands-on activities in this course, you’ll be able to use Word confidently at home or on the job.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Introduction
Intro to Word; Typing a Word Document

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Typing and Navigation
Document Navigation

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

File Management
Basic File Management

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Editing/Cutting & Pasting
Editing Documents; Cutting and Pasting

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working with Multiple Documents
Working With Multiple Documents

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Text Formatting and Alignment
Text Formatting and Alignment

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Printing
Printing

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Margins, Tabs, & Page Numbering
Margins, Tabs, and Page Numbering

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Paragraph Formatting
Indentation and Paragraph Formatting

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Language Tools
Language Tools

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Customizing Word
Customizing Word

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Advanced File Management
Advanced File Management
Microsoft Windows 7 or Vista or XP, Microsoft Word 2010 or Microsoft Office 2010 Home & Student or Microsoft Office 2010 Home & Business or Microsoft Office 2010 Professional. A free 60-day trial version of Office 2010 may be available at http://www2.buyoffice.microsoft.com/usa/?torb=4&WT.mc_id=ODC_ENUS_GenTry_Control.

This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Note:  "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Word 2010 will not work with the full version of Word taught in this course. 
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Word 2011 for Mac

Introduction to Microsoft Word 2011 for Mac

$190 + applicable tax

The world's most popular word processor for creating documents and formatting text is Microsoft Word. Now you can learn to use Word 2011, the version specifically designed to work with Apple's popular Macintosh computers. Whether you're new to Word or you're familiar with Word for Windows, you'll quickly master the program's user interface and be able to create pages from your first lesson. In addition, you'll learn how to easily transfer documents between Word 2011 for Mac and any version of Microsoft Word running on Windows so you can share documents with friend and coworkers effortlessly.

If you're not familiar with any version of Word for Windows, don't worry. This course will guide you through the basics of using Word 2011 for Mac, starting with creating a document, typing and editing text, and formatting your text with different colors, fonts, and font sizes so you can truly express yourself. You'll even learn how to design individual pages and add pictures to your documents.

You'll also learn how to save your documents and how to print all the pages in a document, or just the one or two pages you really need. You'll even learn how to customize Word so it works and looks the way you like. Finally, if you need to type foreign languages that require accent marks, you'll learn how to do that too! By the end of this course, you'll be comfortable using Word 2011 to create everything from simple letters to reports.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting to Know Microsoft Word 2011 for Mac
Microsoft Word is the standard word processing program in business today. Now you can use this powerful program on your Mac, and even share files with anyone who uses Word for Windows. In this first lesson, you'll learn your way around the program, and master the key steps to getting up and running. You'll also start using the program to understand its basic user interface. Finally, you'll see how to create and save a new document.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Navigating and Editing Text
Once you understand the basic user interface of Word 2011, you'll probably be anxious to start using Word to create letters and reports. In this lesson, you'll take the next step by learning how to work with a document you've created. We'll start by examining several methods for moving around quickly within your text. Then we'll explore the different ways Word helps you edit your text. Through editing, you can make your writing cleaner and more focused by changing, deleting, or adding words, or by moving text to different locations. And, as you'll see, Word gives you lots of options for doing all these things!

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Searching and Correcting Text
So, now you've learned how to create a new document and type in your text. Oh, no! You realize there's a word you need to change all throughout the document. That means you've got to scroll through the whole thing, slowly and tediously, reading until you find that word, right? Actually, no! In this lesson, you'll learn how you can simplify this task by letting Word find the word or phrase for you. Word can even replace the word with a new word, so you can modify your document quickly and accurately. And all this happens with just a few clicks of the mouse. In addition, you'll get a handle on the tools Word offers, so you can check your spelling and grammar, as well as resources for finding exactly the right word so that your writing always shines.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Formatting Text, Part 1
After you've typed and saved a document, it's time to fine-tune the appearance of your text. One common way to do this is through formatting. With formatting, you don't simply make your text prettier—you also make it easier to read. You can use bold and italics to emphasize important words, capitalization to make headlines really stand out, or make your text easier to read by choosing just the right font. In this lesson, you'll learn about the most commonly used features for formatting your text.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Formatting Text, Part 2
In this lesson, you'll gain even more text formatting techniques, so you can enhance the look of your document and make it more readable. We'll start by seeing how to add a splash of color, either by changing the color of the text or the background behind the text. Then we'll explore a few different ways for changing the formatting of entire paragraphs. You'll learn how to adjust left and right margins, indentation, line spacing, and alignment to create a distinctive look for your document and help make entire paragraphs stand out.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Formatting Pages
You've already seen how to format text. Now it's time to learn how you can format entire pages! Changing the appearance of your pages can be practical, such as defining page margins around the top, bottom, left, and right edges. But formatting pages can also serve a decorative purpose, such as placing a border around the edges. Of course, don't think formatting can't be both decorative and practical at the same time. If you want to change the background color or image on your pages, or display watermarks that show text, images, or even a corporate logo, you can do that, too. In this lesson, you'll learn about all the ways Word can make your pages look pretty.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Designing and Viewing Pages
Flip open any book or magazine, and chances are good that you'll see repetitive text that appears at the top or bottom of each page. This text, called a header and footer, typically displays page numbers, chapter headings, or book titles. If you need to print long documents and want to print specific information at the top or bottom of each page, you need to learn how to create and use headers and footers. Since headers and footers appear on every page, they can get distracting when you're writing or editing a document. To fix this, Word offers different ways to view your document, so you can temporarily display or hide altogether headers and footers.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Manipulating Document Windows
One nice feature of Word is that it lets you open one or more documents and display them on the screen. As long as your screen is big enough, you can arrange multiple document windows side by side, so you can compare text stored in two or more different files. If you're writing a new document, you can open an existing document to use as reference, and even copy and cut text from one document window to paste in a second document window. By manipulating multiple windows, you can be productive with two or more documents at the same time!

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Printing and Sharing Documents
Editing and formatting text can make your documents look perfect, but eventually you'll want to share your hard work with others. The simplest way to share any document is to print it on paper and give that paper copy of your document to others. You can print just a single copy, or you can get fancy and print one or more pages, a range of pages, or multiple copies. Besides printing your documents, you can also distribute documents by sharing files with others. In this lesson, you'll learn all the different ways to share your document with others in person or through the Internet.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Typing Math Symbols and Foreign Language Characters
You can type any text into Word and format it to look pretty with different fonts, colors, and font sizes. However, Word can do more than just print characters from your keyboard, such as letters, numbers, and symbols. You can also type characters that you don't actually see on a typical keyboard, such as mathematical symbols and foreign language characters. In this lesson, you'll learn how to add these unusual symbols and characters, so you can type in foreign languages or add mathematical symbols into a document such as a scientific report.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Playing With Pictures
Word may be the most popular word processing program in the world, but it can do more than just let you write, edit, and format text. What makes many reports, letters, and books come alive is the combination of text with other items such as photographs, drawings, and other objects. A picture may be worth a thousand words, but a picture combined with text can say much more than text by itself. In this lesson, you'll learn how to spice up your documents with pictures, so you can make your documents more visually appealing.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Customizing Word
Word offers so many features—but you'll probably only use a fraction of them. That can make it hard to find the features you need most. To fix this problem, you can customize Word. In this lesson, you'll get tips for adjusting the Ribbon interface, learn about ways to control how Word saves documents, see how to alter your privacy settings, and find out how you can change Word's appearance to suit your preferences. Now you can make Word look and behave exactly the way you want without wasting time changing the program every time you want to use it.

• Internet access
• Email
• One of the following browsers: 
    o Mozilla Firefox 
    o Microsoft Internet Explorer (9.0 or above)
    o Google Chrome
    o Safari
• Adobe PDF  plug-in (a free download obtained at Adobe.com .)

 

Microsoft Word 2011 for Mac and Microsoft Office 2011 for Mac (both Home & Student edition or Home & Business edition) are all acceptable.  Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.  A Macintosh with an Intel processor running Mac OS X 10.5.8 Leopard or higher.

Note: this course is not suitable for Windows users.
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Introduction to Microsoft Word 2013

Introduction to Microsoft Word 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Knowing how to write reports and letters using Microsoft Word is a basic skill needed in nearly any job. This powerful word-processing program lets you professionally type, edit, format, spell check, and print documents.

In this course, you'll master all the basics of Microsoft Word. You'll learn how to add, move through, and edit text; move words from one part of your document to another; work on two or more documents simultaneously; change the size or appearance of text; change margins and tab settings; automatically center, right align, justify, and indent text; use tools such as the grammar checker, spell checker, and thesaurus; and save, retrieve, copy, organize, and print your documents.

You'll also learn dozens of different ways to modify the appearance and content of your documents by adjusting page margins, paragraph tab settings, and line spacing to create great-looking documents quickly and easily. By the time you're done with the step-by-step lessons and hands-on activities in this course, you'll be able to use Word confidently at home or on the job.


Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started
In this introductory lesson, you'll learn how to use the different parts of Word 2013's user interface, how to look at your document from different types of views, how to zoom in and out to magnify or shrink your text, and how to change the margins of individual paragraphs.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Typing and Navigation
The whole purpose of Word is to let you create and edit text, so in this lesson, we'll go over the basics of moving the insertion point and deleting text. Pressing the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys can delete text one character at a time. The keyboard lets you move the insertion point one character, one word, or one line at a time. The mouse lets you quickly move the insertion point and scroll through large documents far faster than the keyboard. By knowing the pros and cons of navigating through a document with the keyboard and mouse, you can use both to help you work faster in Word.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

File Management
In today's lesson, you're going to learn how to save the documents you create in Word. We'll go over how to save documents with unique names, as well as in different formats so that you can share your documents with people using different word processors or even different computers. Finally, you'll learn how to rename, copy, and even delete any files you've created so you'll always be in complete control of all the files you create.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Editing, Cutting, and Pasting
After you've typed some text in a Word document, you may need to edit that text. The easiest way to edit text is to delete it, but a more sophisticated way to edit text is to copy text and paste a duplicate of that text in another location. You may also want to cut text from one part of a document and paste it in a new location. By learning how to copy, cut, and paste text, you can perform more sophisticated editing on all your documents using Word.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Multiple Documents
Most people use Word to view and edit a single document at a time, but Word actually lets you open and view two or more documents at the same time. This can be handy for copying text from one document to another, comparing two different drafts of the same document, or simply using one document as a reference while writing in the second one. By learning how to open, switch between, and view multiple documents, you can increase your productivity with Word.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Text Formatting and Alignment
Once you know how to add, delete, copy, and move text, the next step to modifying your document is to change the physical appearance of your text. You can make text appear in different colors or background highlighting, change the actual size of text, change the alignment of text, and even choose different fonts to modify the way individual letters look. As you can see, Word provides plenty of ways to help you both edit text and change it so it looks visually appealing.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Printing
Most people use Word to print letters and reports. But Word also lets you get creative by letting you choose different paper sizes and orientations. For example, you can print a letter in portrait orientation or print a sign in landscape orientation. Just think of turning a page up so its height is taller than its width (portrait orientation) or turning the page on its side so its width is wider than its height (landscape orientation). Word also lets you choose to print on different paper sizes, such as envelopes, just as long as you can run those odd-shaped paper sheets in your printer. With Word's ability to print on different types of paper sizes and orientation, you can create more than just typical documents using Word.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Margins, Tabs, and Page Numbering
Most of the time when you create a document, you can use the default page settings. But sometimes you may want to modify those settings to change margins around a page to give you more (or less) space on the top, bottom, left, or right sides of a page. By knowing how to set and use margins, you can modify an entire document or just a single page. By using tabs, you can modify how individual paragraphs look on a page. Finally, you'll also learn how to add page numbers to the top or bottom of a page to keep track of the right page order when you print out your document.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Paragraph Formatting
Word can be handy for typing and formatting text, but once you've written several paragraphs worth of text, you may need to format individual paragraphs separately from the rest of your document. Word provides ways to change the appearance of a paragraph's first line, line spacing within a paragraph, and line spacing between paragraphs. In addition, Word lets you create bullet and number lists so you can display short bits of information in a visual manner. With Word's various paragraph formatting options, you can customize the appearance of all your paragraphs.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Language Tools
It's not enough just to write and format your text. After you're done writing, you may need to check your spelling, change your words, and even hyphenate your text to make your entire document look the best it can. For important documents, you may even need to collaborate with others. To keep track of all the changes multiple authors may make to a single document, Word offers a Track Changes feature so you can see exactly what and who changed the document. With so many ways to polish your document, there's no reason not to write exactly what you want to say with Word.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Customizing Word
Word can easily handle any characters you type with a keyboard, but sometimes you may need to type an occasional foreign language character, a mathematical symbol, or an other unusual character that doesn't appear on your keyboard. With Word, you can press different types of keystrokes or search and click the symbol you want to use. This lets you add practically any type of unusual character to your documents, even smiley faces. You probably won't need to type all of these characters regularly, so just find the ones you'll likely need and remember how to use them. Word lets you type practically anything you want, regardless of the limitation of the keys on your keyboard.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Making a Word Document Pretty and Organized
Writing involves more than just typing and editing text. With Word's advanced features, you can insert page breaks and cover pages to adjust how your text appears when you print it out. To make text on each page look its best, you can use drop caps and styles. Finally, you can use outlines to organize your text and quickly move chunks of text within a document just by rearranging an outline heading. By learning these advanced features of Word, you can make each document display text in the most appealing way possible.

Microsoft Word 2013 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1.


Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Word 2016

Introduction to Microsoft Word 2016

$190 + applicable tax

One of the most basic skills needed in any job is writing reports and letters using Microsoft Word 2016 (now available through Office 365). In this course, you'll gain the foundational skills you need to make the most of this powerful program.

Through hands-on instructions, you'll learn how to add and edit text; move words from one part of your document to another; work on two or more documents simultaneously; and format your text. You'll also see how to save, retrieve, copy, organize, and print your documents.

You'll learn dozens of ways to modify the appearance and content of your documents by adjusting page margins, paragraph tab settings, and line spacing to create great-looking documents quickly and easily. If you need to type foreign language characters or symbols, you can do that in Word too.

By using Word's spell and grammar checker, you can catch typos and grammatical mistakes before you print or share your document with others. You'll also explore the program's thesaurus feature, which can help you find exactly the right word. By the time you're done with the step-by-step lessons and hands-on activities in this course, you'll be able to use Word confidently at home or on the job.

Benefits of Instructor-Led Courses:

  • Two lessons are released each week, so you never feel overwhelmed with your workload
  • Access an expert instructor to reinforce your learning and get feedback
  • Learn from your peers and engage in weekly discussion forums

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started
In this introductory lesson, you'll learn how to use the different parts of Word 2016's user interface, how to look at your document in different types of views, how to zoom in and out to magnify or shrink your text, and how to change the margins of individual paragraphs.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Typing and Navigation

The whole purpose of Word is to let you create and edit text, so in this lesson, we'll go over the basics of moving the Insertion Pointer, or Cursor, and deleting text. Pressing the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys can delete text one character at a time. The keyboard lets you move the cursor one character, one word, or one line at a time. The mouse lets you quickly move the cursor and scroll through large documents far faster than the keyboard. By knowing the pros and cons of navigating through a document with the keyboard and mouse, you can use both to help you work faster in Word.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

File Management
In today's lesson, you're going to learn how to save the documents you create in Word. We'll go over how to save documents with unique names, as well as in other formats so that you can share your documents with people using different word processors or even different computers. Finally, you'll learn how to rename, copy, and even delete any files you've created so you'll always be in complete control of all the files you create.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Editing Text
After you've typed some text in a Word document, you may need to edit that text. The easiest way to edit is to delete individual characters using the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys. Another option is using Word's Overtype mode by typing over text you no longer need. If you ever delete anything by mistake, don't panic! Word's handy Undo and Redo commands retrieve unintentionally deleted text. You may also want to delete large chunks of text. Use your keyboard or mouse in tandem with the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys to efficiently remove entire sections of text. By learning how to delete text and undo mistakes, you can edit your documents quickly using Word.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Multiple Documents
Most people use Word to view and edit a single document at a time, but Word actually lets you open and view two or more documents at the same time. This can be handy for copying text from one document to another, comparing two different drafts of the same document, or simply using one document as a reference while writing in the second one. By learning how to open, switch between, and view multiple documents, you can increase your productivity with Word.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Text Formatting and Alignment
Once you know how to add, delete, copy, and move text, the next step to modifying your document is to change the physical appearance of your text. You can make text appear in different colors or background highlighting, change the actual size of text, alter the alignment of text, and even choose different fonts to modify the way individual letters look. As you can see, Word provides plenty of ways to help you both edit text and change it so it looks visually appealing.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Printing
Most people use Word to print letters and reports. But Word also helps you get creative by letting you choose different paper sizes and orientations. For example, you can print a letter in portrait orientation or print a sign in landscape orientation. Just think of turning a page up so its height is taller than its width (portrait orientation) or turning the page on its side so its width is wider than its height (landscape orientation). Word also lets you choose to print on different paper sizes, such as envelopes, just as long as you can run those odd-shaped paper sheets in your printer. With Word's ability to print on different types of paper sizes and orientation, you can create more than just typical documents using Word.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Margins, Tabs, and Page Numbering
Most of the time when you create a document, you can use the default page settings. But sometimes you may want to modify those settings to change margins around a page to give you more (or less) space on the top, bottom, left, or right sides of a page. By knowing how to set and use margins, you can modify an entire document or just a single page. By using tabs, you can modify how individual paragraphs look on a page. Finally, you'll also learn how to add page numbers to the top or bottom of a page to keep track of the right page order when you print out your document.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Paragraph Formatting
Word can be handy for typing and formatting text, but once you've written several paragraphs worth of text, you may need to format individual paragraphs separately from the rest of your document. Word provides ways to change the appearance of a paragraph's first line, line spacing within a paragraph, and line spacing between paragraphs. In addition, Word lets you create bullet and numbered lists so you can display short bits of information in a visual manner. With Word's various paragraph-formatting options, you can customize the appearance of all your paragraphs.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Language Tools
It's not enough just to write and format your text. After you're done writing, you may need to check your spelling, change your words, and even hyphenate your text to make your entire document look the best it can. For important documents, you may even need to collaborate with others. To keep track of all the changes multiple authors may make to a single document, Word offers a Track Changes feature so you can see exactly what and who changed the document. With so many ways to polish your document, there's no reason not to write exactly what you want to say with Word.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Customizing Word
Word can easily handle any characters you type with a keyboard, but sometimes you may need to type an occasional foreign language character, a mathematical symbol, or another unusual character that doesn't appear on your keyboard. With Word, you can press different types of keystrokes or search and click the symbol you want to use. This lets you add practically any type of unusual character to your documents, even smiley faces. You probably won't need to type all of these characters regularly, so just find the ones you'll likely need and remember how to use them. Word lets you type practically anything you want, regardless of the limitation of the keys on your keyboard.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Making a Word Document Pretty and Organized
Writing involves more than just typing and editing text. With Word's advanced features, you can insert page breaks and cover pages to adjust how your text appears when you print it out. To make text on each page look its best, you can use drop caps and styles. Finally, you can use outlines to organize your text and quickly move chunks of text within a document just by rearranging an outline heading. By learning these advanced features of Word, you can make each document display text in the most appealing way possible.

Microsoft Word 2016 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Introduction to Microsoft Word 2019/Office 365

Introduction to Microsoft Word 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

Across all industries, the ability to create documents in a word processor is essential in day-to-day functions. From writing reports to Knowing how to use Microsoft Word, the most widely-used word processing program, adds an important skill set to your professional profile. 

This course will introduce you to the 2019 version of Microsoft Word, available through the Office 365 online platform. You will learn the basics of Word 2019 needed to write and edit text and to create, format, and organize documents. By the time you're done with these hands-on activities, you will be able to use Word confidently at home or on the job.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Getting Started
In this introductory lesson, you'll learn how to use the different parts of Word 2019's user interface, how to look at your document in different types of views, how to zoom in and out to magnify or shrink your text, and how to change the margins of individual paragraphs.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Typing and Navigation
The whole purpose of Word is to let you create and edit text, so in this lesson, we'll go over the basics of moving the Insertion Pointer, or Cursor, and deleting text. Pressing the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys can delete text one character at a time. The keyboard lets you move the cursor one character, one word, or one line at a time. The mouse lets you quickly move the cursor and scroll through large documents far faster than the keyboard. By knowing the pros and cons of navigating through a document with the keyboard and mouse, you can use both to help you work faster in Word.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

File Management
In today's lesson, you're going to learn how to save the documents you create in Word. We'll go over how to save documents with unique names, as well as in other formats so that you can share your documents with people using different word processors or even different computers. Finally, you'll learn how to rename, copy, and even delete any files you've created so you'll always be in complete control of all the files you create.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Editing Text
After you've typed some text in a Word document, you may need to edit that text. The easiest way to edit is to delete individual characters using the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys. Another option is using Word's Overtype mode by typing over text you no longer need. If you ever delete anything by mistake, don't panic! Word's handy Undo and Redo commands retrieve unintentionally deleted text. You may also want to delete large chunks of text. Use your keyboard or mouse in tandem with the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys to efficiently remove entire sections of text. By learning how to delete text and undo mistakes, you can edit your documents quickly using Word.

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Working With Multiple Documents
Most people use Word to view and edit a single document at a time, but Word actually lets you open and view two or more documents at the same time. This can be handy for copying text from one document to another, comparing two different drafts of the same document, or simply using one document as a reference while writing in the second one. By learning how to open, switch between, and view multiple documents, you can increase your productivity with Word.

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Text Formatting and Alignment
Once you know how to add, delete, copy, and move text, the next step to modifying your document is to change the physical appearance of your text. You can make text appear in different colors or background highlighting, change the actual size of text, alter the alignment of text, and even choose different fonts to modify the way individual letters look. As you can see, Word provides plenty of ways to help you both edit text and change it so it looks visually appealing.

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Printing
Most people use Word to print letters and reports. But Word also helps you get creative by letting you choose different paper sizes and orientations. For example, you can print a letter in portrait orientation or print a sign in landscape orientation. Just think of turning a page up so its height is taller than its width (portrait orientation) or turning the page on its side so its width is wider than its height (landscape orientation). Word also lets you choose to print on different paper sizes, such as envelopes, just as long as you can run those odd-shaped paper sheets in your printer. With Word's ability to print on different types of paper sizes and orientation, you can create more than just typical documents using Word.

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Margins, Tabs, and Page Numbering
Most of the time when you create a document, you can use the default page settings. But sometimes you may want to modify those settings to change margins around a page to give you more (or less) space on the top, bottom, left, or right sides of a page. By knowing how to set and use margins, you can modify an entire document or just a single page. By using tabs, you can modify how individual paragraphs look on a page. Finally, you'll also learn how to add page numbers to the top or bottom of a page to keep track of the right page order when you print out your document.

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Paragraph Formatting
Word can be handy for typing and formatting text, but once you've written several paragraphs worth of text, you may need to format individual paragraphs separately from the rest of your document. Word provides ways to change the appearance of a paragraph's first line, line spacing within a paragraph, and line spacing between paragraphs. In addition, Word lets you create bullet and numbered lists, so you can display short bits of information in a visual manner. With Word's various paragraph-formatting options, you can customize the appearance of all your paragraphs.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Language Tools
It's not enough just to write and format your text. After you're done writing, you may need to check your spelling, change your words, and even hyphenate your text to make your entire document look the best it can. For important documents, you may even need to collaborate with others. To keep track of all the changes multiple authors may make to a single document, Word offers a Track Changes feature, so you can see exactly what and who changed the document. With so many ways to polish your document, there's no reason not to write exactly what you want to say with Word.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Customizing Word
Word can easily handle any characters you type with a keyboard, but sometimes you may need to type an occasional foreign language character, a mathematical symbol, or another unusual character that doesn't appear on your keyboard. With Word, you can press different types of keystrokes or search and click the symbol you want to use. This lets you add practically any type of unusual character to your documents, even smiley faces. You probably won't need to type all of these characters regularly, so just find the ones you'll likely need and remember how to use them. Word lets you type practically anything you want, regardless of the limitation of the keys on your keyboard.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Making a Word Document Pretty and Organized
Writing involves more than just typing and editing text. With Word's advanced features, you can insert page breaks and cover pages to adjust how your text appears when you print it out. To make text on each page look its best, you can use drop caps and styles. Finally, you can use outlines to organize your text and quickly move chunks of text within a document just by rearranging an outline heading. By learning these advanced features of Word, you can make each document display text in the most appealing way possible.

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. A Mac OS is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Word, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment).
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

There are no prerequisites to take this course.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Word 2010

Intermediate Microsoft Word 2010

$190 + applicable tax

Microsoft Word 2010 is a powerful and popular program, yet most people use only a fraction of its features. In this course, you'll learn Microsoft Word's more advanced features, which can make writing easier, faster, and more fun. You'll improve your creativity and efficiency at the same time!

In the first part of the course, you'll learn how to perform a mail merge, and we'll explore shortcuts, styles, and templates. Shortcut keys and macros let you type repetitive words and phrases quickly and accurately at the touch of a button. Styles let you save text formatting. Templates let you create documents that contain predefined formatting and text, making it a snap to create documents that look right every time.

In the second part of the course, we'll cover how to use Word as a simple desktop publishing program to create signs, flyers, menus, brochures, and even newsletters. You'll learn how to insert different types of graphics in a document including digital photographs from your own camera, clip art images provided by Microsoft, and different types of charts such as bar, line, or pie charts.

Next, you'll find out how to wrap text around graphic images and divide a page into columns and text boxes. Both columns and text boxes give you different ways to display text beyond the traditional appearance of text that fills an entire page.

Finally, in the last part of this course, you'll learn about printing labels, making form letters, and creating an index, table of contents, and list of figures automatically. If you need to create long documents, you'll appreciate Word's ability to keep track of page numbers for your chapter headings or index entries.

Whether you need to produce a short letter, flyer, report, or book-length manuscript, this course will teach you how to get the most out of Microsoft Word 2010!

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Shortcuts and Time-Savers in Word 2010
We've come a long way since the days of the typewriter. What used to take hours can now be done in seconds with Microsoft Word 2010. And the less time you spend typing, the more time you can spend being creative and having fun. In this lesson, you'll learn shortcuts in Word that can help you create documents faster and more accurately than ever before. Not only will these shortcuts save you time, but they'll help you create letters and reports more easily than you might have thought possible.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Text and Paragraph Formatting Methods
What you write is half of communication. The other half is getting people to read what you write. One way to make your writing more appealing is to make it look presentable with formatting. Of course, formatting text is easy, but applying different types of formatting over and over again can get tedious. That's why today you'll learn a fast and easy way to format chunks of text quickly and consistently using something called styles. You'll find out what a style is, how to apply it, and more important, how to create and save your own styles to use in any document. By the end of this lesson, you'll be able to make any document look presentable with just the click of your mouse.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Templates
If you've ever baked cookies, or even just watched someone else do it, you know how difficult it can be to make all the cookies in a batch look exactly alike. Some turn out big, some small, some gooey, and some burned! However, if you use a cookie cutter, you can make identically shaped cookies every time. That's the same principle you'll learn in this lesson, instead of using a cookie cutter, though, you'll use something called a template. A template stores the formatting of a document so you can apply it to another document. Templates let you format entire documents as easily as formatting a single word. Word offers lots of convenient templates stored right on your computer or available over the Internet, and you'll also find out how you can create your own.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Graphics: Part 1
They say a picture is worth a thousand words, so what better way to spice up your documents than by adding pictures? Today, you'll learn how to add your own digital photographs to a document so you can show everyone your vacation pictures, family holidays, or just interesting sights you've captured with your own camera. In addition to adding your own photos, you can also add clip art from Word's massive library of free graphics. And you'll find out how to resize, rotate, and style your pictures, as well as wrap your document text around them. By the end of this lesson, you'll see why Word documents are about much more than words!

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Graphics: Part 2, and Columns
Digital photographs and clip art are just the beginning of what you can do with graphics in Word. Today, you'll discover how to add a variety of informational graphics, including charts, graphs, and WordArt, which allows you to display text as a graphic image. Not only will you learn how to add these graphics, but you'll also find out how to edit them when your data changes. We'll finish off the lesson by seeing how Word allows us to format documents with multiple columns—a handy skill for creating newsletters and publications!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sections and Notes
Do you often create long documents? If so, you'll appreciate this lesson, which shows you how to divide a large document into parts called sections. Sections allow you to format part of a document a certain way without that formatting effecting the rest of your text. For example, you may want headers and footers to appear on some pages but not others. Sections make this easy! We'll also spend some time inserting footnotes and endnotes in a document. If you need to write research papers or other academic content, Word makes it a snap to add and format these previously pesky notes!

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Tables
If you've ever seen a spreadsheet, you know how rows and columns let you organize numbers and text on the screen. Well, tables do the same thing in Word. In this lesson, you'll see how to create tables of all different sizes right in a Word document! We'll cover how to modify tables, too. And don't think Excel users get to have all the fun—you can even enter formulas to perform calculations in your tables, sort them, and style them for a customized look. Your data has never looked so appealing!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Envelopes and Odd-Size Pages
You probably print most of your documents on standard letter-size paper. While this is great for ordinary letters or business reports, sometimes you may want to get creative with your paper sizes. But then there's the trouble of printing. In this lesson, you'll see how you can define the dimensions of the paper you're using so Word will print everything correctly. You'll also learn how to print names and addresses directly on envelopes of any size. After this lesson, you won't feel confined to boring 8 1/2 x 11-inch paper anymore!

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Desktop Publishing: Part 1
As you've probably already figured out, Word can do more than write letters. It can also function as a simple desktop publishing program for creating greeting cards, calendars, or newsletters. Today, you'll find out how text boxes are the key to simple desktop publishing, and you'll see how other elements come into play in customized documents. Along the way, we'll look at business cards and greeting cards to get a feel for how desktop publishing works. If you've always wanted to create a document that combines text and graphics in an artistic or visually appealing way, you'll find out how to do that and much more.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Desktop Publishing: Part 2
With the basics down, it's time to take our desktop publishing skills to the next level. Today, you'll discover the magic of linked text boxes that give you the power to move your text anywhere you want on the page and keep it flowing. You'll see how to create, position, resize, and group text boxes so you have total control over your text.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Merging Data with Documents
Did you ever get one of those "personalized" letters from a company in the mail? You can be sure that nobody typed the entire sales letter from scratch. Instead, the company used a form letter and something called mail merging. In this lesson, you'll learn how to store long lists of names and addresses that you can use over and over again in a form letter. Just create a document once, leave blanks for inserting information such as names and addresses, and let Word personalize each letter for you. Now you, too, can create personalized letters for business or personal use, such as sending out holiday greetings to family members and friends.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Final Touches
Look in most books, and you'll find a table of contents at the beginning and an index in the back. Often, these are the last components added to a document, since they need to have accurate titles and page numbers. But Word takes a lot of the tedious work out of creating these components. In this final lesson, you'll see how you can use Styles to make creating a table of contents a snap, and we'll explore how to tag index terms so Word knows what page they're on, even if they move later. Word can also help you keep track of any figures, such as charts, illustrations, or graphs, in your document. By letting Word worry about the details, you can create an accurate table of contents, index, or list of figures with very little extra effort on your part. These finishing touches will make your most important documents shine!
Microsoft Word 2010 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7. Note: this course is not suitable for Macintosh users. A free 60-day trial version of Office 2010 may be available at http://www2.buyoffice.microsoft.com/usa/?torb=4&WT.mc_id=ODC_ENUS_GenTry_Control.

Note:  "Starter Version" and "Web App" versions of Microsoft Word 2010 will not work with the full version of Word taught in this course. 
Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Word 2013

Intermediate Microsoft Word 2013

$190 + applicable tax

Go beyond the basics of desktop publishing with Microsoft Word 2013. In this course, you'll learn how to automate Word 2013 to help you write more while typing less. You'll also learn different ways to format text; how to add graphics to create signs, newsletters, or greeting cards; and how to generate documents with indexes and tables of content.

We'll go through tips on automating Word using macros, shortcut keys, and templates so you can create even the most complex formatted documents quickly and easily. You'll also learn how to create and organize text in tables, add graphics to a document, mix graphics and text together, and merge spreadsheet and data to create mailing labels and form letters.

Along the way, we'll go through lots of short examples and hands-on exercises so you can see how Word's advanced features work—but more importantly, you'll see how you can use these advanced features for your projects. By the end of this course, you'll know how to use Word more effectively and take advantage of all its features so you can get your work done more quickly and easily than you thought possible.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Shortcuts and Time-Savers in Word 2013
We've come a long way since the days of the typewriter. What used to take hours can now be done in seconds with Microsoft Word 2013. And the less time you spend typing, the more time you can spend being creative and having fun. In this lesson, you'll learn shortcuts in Word that can help you create documents faster and more accurately than ever before. Not only will these shortcuts save you time, but they'll help you create letters and reports more easily than you might have thought possible.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Text and Paragraph Formatting Methods

What you write is half of communication. The other half is getting people to read what you write. One way to make your writing more appealing is to make it look presentable with formatting. Of course, formatting text is easy, but applying different types of formatting over and over again can get tedious. That's why today you'll learn a fast and easy way to format chunks of text quickly and consistently using something called styles. You'll find out what a style is, how to apply it, and more important, how to create and save your own styles to use in any document. By the end of this lesson, you'll be able to make any document look presentable with just the click of your mouse.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Templates

If you've ever baked cookies, or even just watched someone else do it, you know how difficult it can be to make all the cookies in a batch look exactly alike. Some turn out big, some small, some gooey, and some burned! However, if you use a cookie cutter, you can make identically shaped cookies every time. That's the same principle you'll learn in this lesson, instead of using a cookie cutter, though, you'll use something called a template. A template stores the formatting of a document so you can apply it to another document. Templates let you format entire documents as easily as formatting a single word. Word offers lots of convenient templates stored right on your computer or available over the Internet, and you'll also find out how you can create your own.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Graphics: Part 1
They say a picture is worth a thousand words, so what better way to spice up your documents than by adding pictures? Today, you'll learn how to add your own digital photographs to a document so you can show everyone your vacation pictures, family holidays, or just interesting sights you've captured with your own camera. In addition to adding your own photos, you can also add clip art from Word's massive library of free graphics. And you'll find out how to resize, rotate, and style your pictures, as well as wrap your document text around them. By the end of this lesson, you'll see why Word documents are about much more than words!

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Graphics: Part 2 and Columns
Digital photographs and clip art are just the beginning of what you can do with graphics in Word. Today, you'll discover how to add a variety of informational graphics, including charts, graphs, and WordArt, which allows you to display text as a graphic image. Not only will you learn how to add these graphics, but you'll also find out how to edit them when your data changes. We'll finish off the lesson by seeing how Word allows us to format documents with multiple columns—a handy skill for creating newsletters and publications!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sections and Notes
Do you often create long documents? If so, you'll appreciate this lesson, which shows you how to divide a large document into parts called sections. Sections allow you to format part of a document a certain way without that formatting affecting the rest of your text. For example, you may want headers and footers to appear on some pages but not others. Sections make this easy! We'll also spend some time inserting footnotes and endnotes in a document. If you need to write research papers or other academic content, Word makes it a snap to add and format these previously pesky notes!

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Tables
If you've ever seen a spreadsheet, you know how rows and columns let you organize numbers and text on the screen. Well, tables do the same thing in Word. In this lesson, you'll see how to create tables of all different sizes right in a Word document! We'll cover how to modify tables, too. And don't think Excel users get to have all the fun—you can even enter formulas to perform calculations in your tables, sort them, and style them for a customized look. Your data has never looked so appealing!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Envelopes and Odd-Size Pages
You probably print most of your documents on standard letter-size paper. While this is great for ordinary letters or business reports, sometimes you may want to get creative with your paper sizes. But then there's the trouble of printing. In this lesson, you'll see how you can define the dimensions of the paper you're using so Word will print everything correctly. You'll also learn how to print names and addresses directly on envelopes of any size. After this lesson, you won't feel confined to boring 8 1/2 x 11-inch paper anymore!

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Desktop Publishing: Part 1
As you've probably already figured out, Word can do more than write letters. It also functions as a simple desktop publishing program for creating greeting cards, calendars, or newsletters. Today, you'll find out how text boxes are the key to simple desktop publishing, and you'll see how other elements come into play in customized documents. Along the way, we'll look at business cards and greeting cards to get a feel for how desktop publishing works. If you've always wanted to create a document that combines text and graphics in an artistic or visually appealing way, you'll find out how to do that and much more.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Desktop Publishing: Part 2
With the basics down, it's time to take our desktop publishing skills to the next level. Today, you'll discover the magic of linked text boxes that give you the power to move your text anywhere you want on the page and keep it flowing. You'll see how to create, position, resize, and group text boxes so you have total control over your text.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Merging Data With Documents
Did you ever get one of those "personalized" letters from a company in the mail? You can be sure that nobody typed the entire sales letter from scratch. Instead, the company used a form letter and something called mail merge. In this lesson, you'll learn how to store long lists of names and addresses that you can use over and over again in a form letter. Just create a document once, leave blanks for inserting information, such as names and addresses, and let Word personalize each letter for you. Now you, too, can create personalized letters for business or personal use, such as sending out holiday greetings to family members and friends.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Final Touches
Look in most books, and you'll find the table of contents at the beginning and an index in the back. Often, these are the last components added to a document, since they need to have accurate titles and page numbers. But Word takes a lot of the tedious work out of creating these components. In this final lesson, you'll see how you can use Styles to make creating the table of contents a snap, and we'll explore how to tag index terms so Word knows what page they're on, even if they move later. Word can also help you keep track of any figures, such as charts, illustrations, or graphs, in your document. By letting Word worry about the details, you can create an accurate table of contents, index, or list of figures with very little extra effort on your part. These finishing touches will make your most important documents shine!

Microsoft Word 2013 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7, Windows 8/8.1, or Windows 10. 

Note:This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Word 2016

Intermediate Microsoft Word 2016

$190 + applicable tax

Go beyond the basics of word processing and master the more advanced features of Microsoft Word 2016 (now available through Office 365). In this course, you'll learn how to automate Word 2016 using shortcuts to help you write more while typing less. From signs, newsletters, and greeting cards to long documents, you'll learn how to create whatever you need—quickly and with professional-looking results.

We'll go through tips for automating Word using macros, shortcut keys, and templates so you can create even the most complex formatted documents quickly and easily. You'll also learn how to create and organize text in tables, mix graphics and text together to turn Word into a simple desktop publishing program, and merge spreadsheet and database data to create mailing labels and form letters.

Along the way, we'll go through lots of examples and exercises so you can see how Word's advanced features work; but more importantly, you'll see how you can use these advanced features at home and on the job. By the end of this course, you'll know how to use Word more effectively and take advantage of all its many features so you can get your work done more quickly and more easily than you ever thought possible.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Shortcuts and Time-Savers in Word 2016
We've come a long way since the days of the typewriter. What used to take hours can now be done in seconds with Microsoft Word 2016. And the less time you spend typing, the more time you can spend being creative and having fun. In this lesson, you'll learn shortcuts in Word that can help you create documents faster and more accurately than ever before. Not only will these shortcuts save you time, but they'll help you create letters and reports more easily than you might have thought possible.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Text and Paragraph Formatting Methods

What you write is half of communication. The other half is getting people to read what you write. One way to make your writing more appealing is to make it look presentable with formatting. Of course, formatting text is easy, but applying different types of formatting over and over again can get tedious. That's why today you'll learn a fast and easy way to format chunks of text quickly and consistently using something called styles. You'll find out what a style is, how to apply it, and more important, how to create and save your own styles to use in any document. By the end of this lesson, you'll be able to make any document look presentable with just the click of your mouse.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Templates

If you've ever baked cookies, or even just watched someone else do it, you know how difficult it can be to make all the cookies in a batch look exactly alike. Some turn out big, some small, some gooey, and some burned! However, if you use a cookie cutter, you can make identically shaped cookies every time. That's the same principle you'll learn in this lesson; instead of using a cookie cutter, though, you'll use something called a template. A template stores the formatting of a document so that you can apply it to another document. Templates let you format entire documents as easily as formatting a single word. Word offers lots of convenient templates stored right on your computer or available over the Internet, and you'll also find out how you can create your own.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Graphics: Part 1
They say a picture is worth a thousand words, so what better way to spice up your documents than by adding pictures? Today, you'll learn how to add your own digital photographs to a document so that you can show everyone your vacation pictures, family holidays, or just interesting sights you've captured with your own camera. In addition to adding your own photos, you can also add clip art from Word's massive library of free graphics. And you'll find out how to resize, rotate, and style your pictures, as well as wrap your document text around them. By the end of this lesson, you'll see why Word documents are about much more than words!

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Graphics: Part 2, and Columns
Digital photographs and clip art are just the beginning of what you can do with graphics in Word. Today, you'll discover how to add a variety of informational graphics, including charts, graphs, and WordArt, which allows you to display text as a graphic image. Not only will you learn how to add these graphics, but you'll also find out how to edit them when your data changes. We'll finish off the lesson by seeing how Word allows us to format documents with multiple columns—a handy skill for creating newsletters and publications!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Sections and Notes
Do you often create long documents? If so, you'll appreciate this lesson, which shows you how to divide a large document into parts called sections. Sections allow you to format part of a document a certain way without that formatting affecting the rest of your text. For example, you may want headers and footers to appear on some pages but not others. Sections make this easy! We'll also spend some time inserting footnotes and endnotes in a document. If you need to write research papers or other academic content, Word makes it a snap to add and format these previously pesky notes!

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Tables
If you've ever seen a spreadsheet, you know how rows and columns let you organize numbers and text on the screen. Well, tables do the same thing in Word. In this lesson, you'll see how to create tables of all different sizes right in a Word document! We'll cover how to modify tables, too. And don't think Excel users get to have all the fun—you can even enter formulas to perform calculations in your tables, sort them, and style them for a customized look. Your data has never looked so appealing!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Envelopes and Odd-Size Pages
You probably print most of your documents on standard letter-size paper. While this is great for ordinary letters or business reports, sometimes you may want to get creative with your paper sizes. But then there's the trouble of printing. In this lesson, you'll see how you can define the dimensions of the paper you're using, so Word will print everything correctly. You'll also learn how to print names and addresses directly on envelopes of any size. After this lesson, you won't feel confined to boring 8 1/2 x 11-inch paper anymore!

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Desktop Publishing: Part 1
As you've probably already figured out, Word can do more than write letters. It can also function as a simple desktop publishing program for creating greeting cards, calendars, or newsletters. Today, you'll find out how text boxes are the key to simple desktop publishing, and you'll see how other elements come into play in customized documents. Along the way, we'll look at business cards and greeting cards to get a feel for how desktop publishing works. If you've always wanted to create a document that combines text and graphics in an artistic or visually appealing way, you'll find out how to do that and much more.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Desktop Publishing: Part 2
With the basics down, it's time to take our desktop publishing skills to the next level. Today, you'll discover the magic of linked text boxes that give you the power to move your text anywhere you want on the page and keep it flowing. You'll see how to create, position, resize, and group text boxes so that you have total control over your text.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Merging Data with Documents
Did you ever get one of those "personalized" letters from a company in the mail? You can be sure that nobody typed the entire sales letter from scratch. Instead, the company used a form letter and something called mail merging. In this lesson, you'll learn how to store long lists of names and addresses that you can use over and over again in a form letter. Just create a document once, leave blanks for inserting information such as names and addresses, and let Word personalize each letter for you. Now you, too, can create personalized letters for business or personal use, such as sending out holiday greetings to family members and friends.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Final Touches
Look in most books, and you'll find a table of contents at the beginning and an index in the back. Often, these are the last components added to a document, since they need to have accurate titles and page numbers. But Word takes a lot of the tedious work out of creating these components. In this final lesson, you'll see how you can use Styles to make creating a table of contents a snap, and we'll explore how to tag index terms so that Word knows what page they're on, even if they move later. Word can also help you keep track of any figures, such as charts, illustrations, or graphs, in your document. By letting Word worry about the details, you can create an accurate table of contents, index, or list of figures with very little extra effort on your part. These finishing touches will make your most important documents shine!

Microsoft Word 2016 (software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins); Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10.

Note: This course is not suitable for Macintosh users.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020
Intermediate Microsoft Word 2019/Office 365

Intermediate Microsoft Word 2019/Office 365

$190 + applicable tax

If you create business documents like letters, brochures, or newsletter, you know that their quality is representative of your organization. And to create professional-quality documents efficiently and effectively, you have to use advanced word processing functions. This online course will teach you how to use Microsoft Word 2019, the newest version of Microsoft Office/Office 365’s widely-used word processing software. 

Through hands-on lessons and modules, you will learn how to use a number shortcuts and time-saving techniques to create complex documents. By the end of the course, you will know how to create and organize tables, manipulate graphics, and merge spreadsheets, amongst other functions, to turn Word into a simple desktop publishing tool.

Week 1 Wednesday - Lesson 1

Timesavers in Word 2019
We've come a long way since the days of the typewriter. What used to take hours can now be done in seconds with Microsoft Word 2019. And the less time you spend typing, the more time you can spend being creative and having fun. In this lesson, you'll learn shortcuts in Word that can help you create documents faster and more accurately than ever before. Not only will these shortcuts save you time, but they'll help you create letters and reports more easily than you might have thought possible.

Week 1 Friday - Lesson 2

Methods to Streamline Text Formatting
What you write is half of communication. The other half is getting people to read what you write. One way to make your writing more appealing is to make it look presentable with formatting. Of course, formatting text is easy, but applying different types of formatting over and over again can get tedious. In this lesson, you'll learn a fast and easy way to format chunks of text quickly and consistently using something called styles. You'll find out what a style is, how to apply it, and—more important—how to create and save your own styles to use in any document. By the end of this lesson, you'll be able to make any document look presentable with just the click of your mouse.

Week 2 Wednesday - Lesson 3

Working with Templates
A template stores the formatting of a document so that you can apply it to another document. Templates let you format entire documents as easily as formatting a single word. Word offers lots of convenient templates stored right on your computer or available over the Internet. In this lesson, you'll learn about how to search and use Word templates, and you'll also discover how you can create your own.

Week 2 Friday - Lesson 4

Adding Graphics to Your Word Documents
They say a picture is worth a thousand words, so what better way to spice up your documents than by adding pictures? In this lesson, you'll learn how to add your own digital photographs to a document so that you can show everyone your vacation pictures, family holidays, or just interesting sights you've captured with your own camera. In addition to adding your own photos, you can also add clip art from Word's massive library of free graphics. And you'll find out how to resize, rotate, and style your pictures, as well as wrap your document text around them. By the end of this lesson, you'll see why Word documents are about much more than words!

Week 3 Wednesday - Lesson 5

Creating Text-Based Graphics in Word
Digital photographs and clip art are just the beginning of what you can do with graphics in Word. In Lesson 5, you'll discover how to add a variety of informational graphics, including charts, graphs, and WordArt, which allows you to display text as a graphic image. Not only will you learn how to add these graphics, but you'll also find out how to edit them when your data changes. You'll finish off the lesson by seeing how Word allows us to format documents with multiple columns—a handy skill for creating newsletters and publications!

Week 3 Friday - Lesson 6

Organizing Your Text with Columns and Sections
Do you often create long documents? If so, you'll appreciate this lesson, which shows you how to divide a large document into parts called sections. Sections allow you to format part of a document a certain way without that formatting affecting the rest of your text. For example, you may want headers and footers to appear on some pages but not others. Sections make this easy! You'll also spend some time inserting footnotes and end-notes in a document. If you need to write research papers or other academic content, Word makes it a snap to add and format these previously pesky notes!

Week 4 Wednesday - Lesson 7

Creating Tables in Word
If you've ever seen a spreadsheet, you know how rows and columns let you organize numbers and text on the screen. Well, tables do the same thing in Word. In this lesson, you'll see how to create tables of all different sizes right in a Word document! You'll cover how to modify tables, too. And don't think Excel users get to have all the fun—you can even enter formulas to perform calculations in your tables, sort them, and style them for a customized look. Your data has never looked so appealing!

Week 4 Friday - Lesson 8

Creating Stationary in Word
You probably print most of your documents on standard letter-size paper. While this is great for ordinary letters or business reports, sometimes you may want to get creative with your paper sizes. But then there's the trouble of printing. In this lesson, you'll see how you can define the dimensions of the paper you're using, so Word will print everything correctly. You'll also learn how to print names and addresses directly on envelopes of any size. After this lesson, you won't feel confined to boring 8 1/2 x 11-inch paper anymore!

Week 5 Wednesday - Lesson 9

Creating Business Stationary in Word
As you've probably already figured out, Word can do more than write letters. It can also function as a simple desktop publishing program for creating greeting cards, calendars, or newsletters. In Lesson 9, you'll find out how text boxes are the key to simple desktop publishing, and you'll see how other elements come into play in customized documents. Along the way, we'll look at business cards and greeting cards to get a feel for how desktop publishing works. If you've always wanted to create a document that combines text and graphics in an artistic or visually appealing way, you'll find out how to do that and much more.

Week 5 Friday - Lesson 10

Desktop Publishing
With the basics down, it's time to take your desktop publishing skills to the next level. In this lesson, you'll discover the magic of linked text boxes that give you the power to move your text anywhere you want on the page and keep it flowing. You'll see how to create, position, resize, and group text boxes so that you have total control over your text.

Week 6 Wednesday - Lesson 11

Merging Data with Documents
Did you ever get one of those "personalized" letters from a company in the mail? You can be sure that nobody typed the entire sales letter from scratch. Instead, the company used a form letter and something called mail merging. In this lesson, you'll learn how to store long lists of names and addresses that you can reuse in a form letter. Just create a document once, leave blanks for inserting information such as names and addresses, and let Word personalize each letter for you. Now, you too can create personalized letters for business or personal use, such as sending out holiday greetings to family members and friends.

Week 6 Friday - Lesson 12

Creating Summative Lists of What’s in Your Document
Look in most books, and you'll find a table of contents at the beginning and an index in the back. Often, these are the last components added to a document, since they need to have accurate titles and page numbers. Thankfully, Word takes a lot of the tedious work out of creating these components. In this final lesson, you'll see how you can use Styles to make creating a table of contents a snap, and you'll explore how to tag index terms so that Word knows what page they're on, even if they move later. Word can also help you keep track of any figures, such as charts, illustrations, or graphs, in your document. By letting Word worry about the details, you can create an accurate table of contents, index, or list of figures with very little extra effort on your part. These finishing touches will make your most important documents shine!

Requirements:

Hardware Requirements: 

  • This course must be taken on a PC. A Mac OS is not compatible.

Software Requirements: 

  • Windows 10 or later operating systems.
  • Browser: The latest version of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox are preferred. Microsoft Edge is also compatible.
  • Microsoft Word, a subscription to Office 365, or Microsoft Office Home and Student 2019 (not included in enrollment)
  • Adobe Flash Player. Click here to download the Flash Player.
  • Adobe Acrobat Reader. Click here to download the Acrobat Reader.
  • Software must be installed and fully operational before the course begins.

Other:

  • Email capabilities and access to a personal email account.

Prerequisites:

Completion of “Introduction to Microsoft Word 2019 or basic familiarity with Microsoft Word’s word processing and editing.

Instructional Material Requirements:

The instructional materials required for this course are included in enrollment and will be available online.

Course Details
This course is fully online, you require internet access and an email account. The course duration is 6 weeks, followed by a 2-week period to complete the final exam (online, open book). Lessons are released on Wednesdays and Fridays of each week, for a total of 12. You are not required to be online at any specific time.

In addition to the specific lesson content, there is a discussion board with each lesson and often there is an optional assignment to apply the learning.

Following each lesson, there is a short multiple choice quiz. Your score on these quizzes does not count towards the final mark but completing these helps solidify your learning as well as prepare you for the final exam.

The final exam is an open-book, multiple choice exam and you need to achieve a minimum of 65% on the final exam to pass the course. There is only one opportunity to pass the exam. A certificate of completion from Ed2Go is available for printing immediately upon successful completion of the course and a certificate from the University of Waterloo will be mailed typically 4-6 weeks later.

Certificates
Many of the Ed2Go courses are eligible towards the various online certificates offered by Professional Development.

Choose your course start date:

Sep 11, 2019Oct 16, 2019Nov 13, 2019Dec 11, 2019Jan 15, 2020Feb 12, 2020